Cookery LM Mod.2 SHS v.1
Cookery LM Mod.2 SHS v.1
Cookery
PY
ManualO
C
E D
EP
Department of Education
Republic of the Philippines
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Technical Vocational Livelihood Education – Cookery Module 2
Manual
First Edition, 2016
Republic Act 8293. Section 176 states that: No copyright shall subsist in any work of
the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or office
wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit. Such
agency or office may, among other things, impose as a condition the payment of royalties.
Borrowed materials (i.e., songs, stories, poems, pictures, photos, brand names,
trademarks, etc.) included in this learning resource are owned by their respective copyright
holders. DepEd is represented by the Filipinas Copyright Licensing Society (FILCOLS), Inc. in
seeking permission to use these materials from their respective copyright owners. All means
have been exhausted in seeking permission to use these materials. The publisher and authors
do not represent nor claim ownership over them
PY
Only institutions and companies which have entered an agreement with FILCOLS and
only within the agreed framework may copy from this Learning Resource. Those who have not
entered in an agreement with FILCOLS must, if they wish to copy, contact the publishers and
authors directly.
Authors and publishers may email or contact FILCOLS at [email protected] or (02)
435-5258, respectively.
O
Secretary: Br. Armin A. Luistro FSC
Undersecretary: Dina S. Ocampo, PhD
C
Development Team of the Cookery Manual
D
Writers: Aniceta S. Kong and Anecita P. Domo
Editor: Merlyn Lee
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Cover Page
Table of Contents
Introduction...…………………………………………………………. 1
Content Standard and Performance Standard………………… 2
Objectives………………………………………………………….. 2
Program Requirements…………………………………………… 2
Learning Episodes………………………………………………… 3
How to Use this Learner’s Material……………………………… 4
Diagnostic Assessment……………………………………………… 4
PY
Personal Entrepreneurial Competencies (PECs)……………….. 9
Environment and Market (EM)……………………………………… 19
O
Objectives………………………………………………………… 35
Pretest 1………………………………………………………… 35 C
Lesson 1 Prepare Egg Dishes
LO 1 Perform Mise En Place……………………………….. 39
LO 2 Prepare and Cook Egg Dishes………………………. 49
D
LO 3 Present Egg dishes……………………………………. 69
LO 4 Evaluate the Finished Product…………………………. 80
Lesson 2 Prepare Cereals and Starch Dishes
E
iii
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2 Prepare and Cook Seafood Dishes
LO 1 Perform Mise En Place………………………………… 157
LO 2 Handle Fish and Seafood …………………………….. 163
LO 3 Cook Fish and Shellfish………………… ……………… 168
LO 4 Plate/Present Fish and Seafood Dishes………………. 184
LO 5 Store Fish and Seafood…….…………………………… 190
LO 6 Evaluate the Finished Product...................................... 191
Posttest 2………………………………………………………… 192
PY
Pre-Test 3………………………………………………….………. 195
O
LO 3 Prepare Sauces Required for Menu Items…………… 221
LO 4 Store and Reconstitute Stocks, Sauces and Soups… 231
LO 5 Evaluate the Finished Product.................................... 231
Lesson 2 Prepare Poultry and Game Dishes
C
LO 1 Perform Mise En Place…………………………….….. 233
LO 2 Cook Poultry and Game Bird Dishes………………… 241
D
LO 3 Plate/Present Poultry Game Bird Dishes………….… 254
LO 4 Store Poultry and Game Bird…………………………. 259
LO 5 Evaluate the Finished Product................................... 259
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Introduction
The Technology and Livelihood Education (TLE) for junior high school and
Technical-Vocational-Livelihood Education (TVL) for senior high school is one track
in the implementation of the K to 12 Basic Education Program (BEP). The TLE/TVL
Track has four strands, namely: Agri-Fishery Arts, Home Economics, Industrial Arts,
and Information and Communication Technology. Learners in Grades 7 and 8 take
exploratory courses under the track; tackling common competencies that they
would need, helping them pursue a career in TVL. Their learnings and
competencies are further enhanced in Grades 9 and 10, up to Senior High.
This learning resource focuses on the course Cookery (National Certificate Level II)
under the Home Economics strand of the TVL track. The Department of Education
aims that this learning resource contributes to the attainment of the realization of
PY
the overall goal of the K to 12 Basic Education Program, which is the holistic
development of every Filipino learner: equipped with 21st century skills, adequately
prepared for work, and has gained the right knowledge, attitude, values and skills to
start a business, acquire middle level skills, and to advance in higher education.
Cookery Module 2 of 2
O
This is the second of two modules that make up the Cookery Manual. It includes
information and activities to develop desirable values, skills and understanding
C
through authentic tasks on how to clean, maintain and sanitize kitchen tools,
equipment, and working premises which are important routines after each
preparation of foods in the kitchen. It also contains step-by-step procedures and
helpful techniques and guidelines on how to prepare, present and store appetizers,
D
salads and salad dressings, sandwiches and desserts, all of which do not require
heat in preparation. Provisions for practical application to real life situation are also
included for lifelong learning.
E
in order to attain success. The market and environment lessons on the other hand,
will show them how to identify needs and wants of people in the community for
possible business opportunity. All of these expose learners to a wide variety of
experiences and opportunities to acquire work skills, work values and expertise
which will help learners in choosing an occupation or career and/or eventually put
up his or her own business in line with cookery thus, making learners self-reliant
D
To the Learner:
This manual provides varied and relevant activities and opportunities to determine
your understanding of the key concepts and to demonstrate core competencies as
prescribed in the TESDA Training Regulation in Cookery.
This manual is specifically crafted to focus on the different activities that will
assess your level in terms of skills and knowledge necessary to get a Certificate of
Competency and/or National Certification (NC II).
Successful completion of this specialization ensures that you have acquired the
essential skills to be on your way to becoming a certified chef.
1
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Content Standard
Performance Standard
PY
Objectives
As a learner, I am expected to become proficient in performing the following
competencies:
O
1. develop personal entrepreneurial skills;
2. prepare egg dishes;
3. prepare cereals and starch dishes;
4. prepare vegetables dishes;
C
5. prepare and cook seafood dishes;
6. prepare stocks, sauces and soups;
7. prepare poultry and game dishes; and
D
8. prepare and cooking meat.
E
Program Requirements
Grade 10 students who will take Cookery course as their specialization
EP
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
This learner’s material should be taken for one school year for a total of
160 hours. Lessons should be taken one at a time, following the correct sequence
being presented and should accomplish the assessment or enhancement activities
before proceeding to the next lesson.
Along the learning process, learners of this course are required to complete
the 25-hour industry involvement to different food services to experience the actual
workplace.
Learning Episodes
This learning resource is subdivided into four (4) quarters which may serve
as the recommended scope and limit for every academic grading period. In every
PY
quarter there are lessons that comprise the learning outcomes.
O
(PECS) and demonstrate your understanding about the Environment and Market.
C
Quarter I is composed of two lessons. Lesson I is about preparation,
cooking and presenting different kinds of egg dishes while Lesson II is on cereals
and starch dishes.
D
dishes and learning the different kinds and classification of vegetables, and
seafood, cooking, plating dishes and storing food items.
EP
Quarter III consists of lessons on preparing stocks, sauces and soups, and
poultry and game dishes.
D
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
HOW TO USE THIS LEARNER’S MATERIAL
PY
activity carefully. If you encounter difficulties, do not hesitate to consult your teacher
for assistance. Do not skip any topic unless you are told to do so. REMEMBER
that each activity is a preparation for the succeeding activities.
3. For every lesson/learning outcomes, perform the enhancement activities to enrich
O
the knowledge and skills.
4. After you have successfully finished the tasks, answer the posttest to be given by
C
your teacher. Your score will be analyzed and will be used by your teacher for the
computation of your grades.
5. Lastly, DO NOT mark the learner’s material in any way.
E D
EP
DIAGNOSTIC ASSESSMENT
D
A. Multiple Choice
Read the following questions carefully and choose the letter that best describes
the statement. Write your answer on your test notebook.
1. Which of the following is the right step-by-step procedures in manual
dishwashing.
A. drain and air-dry, scrape and pre-rinse, rinse, sanitize, and wash dishes.
B. rinse, scrape and pre-rinse, wash, drain, air-dry and sanitize dishes
C. scrape and pre-rinse, rinse, wash, sanitize, drain and air-dry dishes
D. scrape and pre-rinse, wash, rinse, sanitize, drain and air-dry dishes
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Which of the following parts of an egg is produced by the oviduct and
consists of four alternating layers of thick and thin consistencies?
A. air cell C. chalaza
B. albumen D. yolk
3. Which of the following vitamins is found in eggs?
A. B1 C. D
B. C D. K
4. The appearance of egg is important for consumer appeal. On what basis
are shells evaluated?
A. cleanliness, shape, texture and soundness
B. grade, texture, cleanliness, shape
C. shape, texture, cleanliness and size
D. texture, soundness, size and cleanliness
PY
5. 5. Which of the following market forms of eggs is seldom used in cooking?
A. dried egg C. frozen egg
B. fresh egg D. shelled egg
6. Which of the following raises coagulation temperature producing softer,
weaker gel when added to egg used in culinary?
O
A. alkali C. sugar
B. salt D. vinegar
7. Which kind of egg dish is prepared by slipping shelled eggs into barely
A. fried egg
C
simmering water and gently cooking until the egg holds its shape?
C. scrambled egg
B. poached egg D. soft-boiled egg
8. Which of the following tools is not used in cooking omelet?
D
A. bowls C. sauté pan
B. fork D. skimmer
9. Which of the following is true in plating egg dishes?
E
A. Choose a serving dish small enough to let each food item stand out.
B. Play with color and texture.
C. The protein dish should cover half of the plate.
EP
11. Which of the following changes in starch during cooking is the resistance to
flow; increase in thickness or consistency?
A. dextrinization C. retrogadation
B. gelatinization D. viscosity
12. Which of the following is suggested if you will hold pasta for a short time
for later service?
A. Cook pasta ahead of time and chill.
B. Drain and add sauce.
C. Drain, toss with a small amount of oil, cover and hold in warmer.
D. Undercook slightly the pasta.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
13. Which is the process of making a new product to be sold to the customers?
A. product analysis C. product development
B. product conceptualization D. product Implementation
14. This is a meaningful and unforgettable statement that captures the essence
of your brand.
A. branding C. tagline
B. product naming D. unique selling proposition
15. What managerial tool is used to assess the environment to gather important
information for strategic planning?
A. Environmental Scanning C. Survey Analysis
B. SWOT Analysis D. WOTS Analysis
16. From what animal does veal meat come from?
A. calf C. hog
PY
B. deer D. sheep
17. Which of the following market forms of meat does not undergo chilling?
A. cured meat C. frozen meat
B. fresh meat D. processed meat
18. What part of the meat helps you identify the less tender cuts?
O
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
19. What part of the meat has the greatest amount of quality protein?
A. bone
B. fat D. ligament
C C. flesh
20. Which of the following meat cuts requires long and slow cooking
temperature?
D
A. less tender C. tender
B. slightly tough D. tough
21. Which of the following is a long – bladed hatchet or a heavy knife used by
E
a butcher?
A. butchers knife C. cleaver knife
B. chopper knife D. set of slicing knife
EP
22. Which of the cooking methods does not belong to dry heat method?
A. baking C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
23. What do you call the cooking method when meat is cooked in steaming
liquid in which bubbles are breaking on the surface?
D
A. boiling C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
24. Which is an oil-acid mixture used to enhance the flavor of meat?
A. brine solution C. soy sauce and vinegar
B. marinade D. salt and calamansi
25. Which of the following tools is used for carving?
A. cleaver knife C. slicer
B. fork D. razor knife
26. To which meat cut do internal organs belong?
A. less tender cuts C. tough cuts
B. tender cuts D. variety cuts
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
27. Where should meat products be stored?
A. crisper C. dry shelf
B. cold shelf D. freezer
28. Which of the following is the tenderest cut of beef?
A. chunk C. sirloin
B. round cut D. tenderloin
29. Which will you consider first when buying meats?
A. brand C. quality
B. price D. round cut
30. What is your primary consideration when storing goods?
A. expiration date C. quantity
B. fragility D. size
31. What do you call a young immature pigeon of either sex with extra tender
PY
meat?
A. duck C. rooster
B. fryer D. squab
32. To what part of poultry does breast meat belong?
A. dark meat C. variety meat
O
B. tough meat D. white meat
33. Which of the following characteristics is a good quality of a live poultry?
A. Free from pin feathers and shows no cuts.
B. Eyes are clear.
C
C. Is heavy and the skin is watery.
D. Thighs are well-developed.
34. What do you call a young chicken that is usually 9 to 12 weeks old?
D
A. fryer C. roaster
B. hen D. stag
35. How many days should a whole chicken be refrigerated?
E
A. 1 day C. 2 to 4 days
B. 1 to 2 days D. 3 to 4 days
36. How do you classify the fleshy part of chicken like breast?
EP
A. entrails C. viscera
B. dark meat D. white meat
37. What cookery method is used for a matured poultry?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
D
38. What cookery method is suitable for the less tender cuts?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
39. What is the best cooking temperature for poultry?
A. high temperature C. low to moderate temperature
B. low temperature D. moderate temperature
40. What factor affects the poultry meat’s tenderness and juiciness?
A. age C. cuts
B. cookery D. sex
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
41. What is the flavor component of vegetables which gives strong flavor and
odor to some vegetables like onions, leeks, garlic, chives, cabbage, and
broccoli?
A. flavonoids C. sugar
B. glutamic acid D. sulfur compounds
42. What is a way of cooking by placing blanched or raw vegetables in the pan,
adding liquid (stock, water, wine) then covering and cooking it slowly?
A. boiling C. braising
B. baking D. sautéing
43. Which of the following plating styles is not a classic arrangement?
A. Starch or vegetable item is heaped in the center while the main item is
sliced and lean up against it.
B. The main item is in the center, with vegetable distributed around it.
PY
C. The vegetable item is in the rear and main item, starch item and garnish
at the front.
D. The main item is in the center with neat piles of vegetables carefully
arranged around.
44. Which of the following vegetables is cooked uncovered?
O
A. fruit vegetables C. roots and tubers
B. green vegetables D. yellow vegetables
45. Which of the following is a freshwater fish?
A. bluefish
B. catfish
C
C. grouper
D. sole
46. Which is the market form of fish where both sides of a fish is still joined but
bones are removed?
D
A. butterfly C. fillet
B. drawn D. steak
47. Which of the following is a characteristic of a fresh fish?
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Personal Entrepreneurial Competencies
(PECs)
Content Standards Performance Standards
PY
Module 1
O
Introduction C
In this module, you will learn more about entrepreneurship and the
entrepreneurial competencies related to Cookery. You will have a first-hand
experience in educational activities leading to personal assessment of your
entrepreneurial competencies and assessment of entrepreneurial competencies
D
of a successful chef within your area. You will also have some activities that will
align your competencies with those of successful practitioners. Moreover, this
E
module will stimulate your mind to think about entrepreneurship and its role in the
business community, as well as in the economic and social development.
EP
Entrepreneurs are people with skills and capabilities to see and evaluate
business opportunities. They are individuals that can strategically identify products
or services needed by the community and they have the capacity to deliver these
at the right time and at the right place.
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Entrepreneurship is not just a simple business activity. It is a strategic
process of innovation and new venture creation. Basically, entrepreneurship is
both an art and science of converting business ideas into marketable products or
services to improve the quality of living.
Now that you have a little background knowledge about entrepreneurs and
entrepreneurship, can you now walk through in assessing your PECs? Always
remember that “Successful entrepreneurs continuously develop and improve their
PECs.”
To begin with, let us first try to find out the competencies you will master as
PY
you finish this module.
Objectives
O
At the end of this module, you are expected to: C
• identify areas for improvement, development and growth;
• align your PECs according to your business or career choice; and
• create a plan of action that ensures success in your business or career
choice.
D
Now that you have an idea about the knowledge and skill that you will develop
and master, take the first challenge in this module – the pre-assessment.
E
EP
Pre-assessment
As part of your initial activity, you will be challenged to dig deeper into your
knowledge and previous experiences on the topic. Try to diagnose or assess what you
already know about PECs by answering Task 1.
D
10
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Task 1: Matching Type
Match the entrepreneurial competencies in column A with their meaning in
column B. Write the letter of the correct answer on the space provided before each
number.
A B
____1. creative A. make a wise decision towards the set
objectives
____2. profit-oriented B. strategic thinking and setting of goals
____3. discipline C. trust in one’s ability
____4. decision making D. adaptable to change
PY
____5. people skills E. innovative to have edge over other
competitors
____6. planner F. solid dedication
____7. self-confidence G. skillful in record keeping
O
____8. hardworking H. always stick to the plan
____9. ability to accept change C I. working diligently
____10. committed J effective and efficient communication
and relation to people
K. always looking for income
D
The following are guide questions which encapsulate the entire module. Write
your answers on your assignment notebook and share these to the class.
EP
B. What entrepreneurial activities do you know and capable of doing which are
D
related to Cookery?
C. Given the opportunity to own a business that relates with Cookery, are you
confident to manage it? Explain your answer.
D. What do you think are the most important competencies you must possess in
order to be successful in running your chosen business?
11
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
After answering all the guide questions to the best of your knowledge
and skills, share them with your classmates. You too may compare your
insights, personal knowledge, and relevant experiences on the topic to make
it more exciting and engaging.
PY
Goals and Goals
Learning
and Learning
Goals and Learning Ultimate Goal Ultimate G
Targets Targets
Activities Ultimate Goal
Activities
Targets Activities
O
Figure 1: Strategic process to achieve the objectives of this module
C
Reading Resources and Instructional Activities
Having gone through setting your own personal goals and targets in achieving
D
the objectives of this module, check your inherent knowledge of PECs. Answer the
following guide questions with the help of your classmates.
E
2. Are there other strategies or approaches where you can assess your PECs?
Explain how those strategies will become more useful in selecting a viable
business venture.
3. What are the desirable personal characteristics, attributes, lifestyles, skills and
traits of a prospective entrepreneur? Why are these important?
4. Why is there a need to assess one’s PECs in terms of characteristics, attributes,
lifestyles, skills, and traits before starting a particular business?
5. What is the significance of evaluating PECs of a successful entrepreneur?
What helpful insights can you draw from this activity?
12
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
How was your experience in answering the guide questions with your
classmates? Were you able to benefit from them? What were the insights you have
realized?
This time you’re going to study the different topics that will enrich your knowledge
of PECs. Read carefully all the important details about the succeeding topic.
Know
PY
Assessment of Personal Entrepreneurial Competencies (PECs) and
Skills vis-à-vis a Practicing Entrepreneur or Employee in a Province
O
In this module, you will learn some of the most important characteristics, attributes,
lifestyle, skills and traits of a successful entrepreneur in order to be successful in a
chosen career.
C
Below are few important characteristics, traits, or attributes of a good
entrepreneur:
D
• Hardworking: One of the important characteristics of a good
entrepreneur is hardworking. This means habitually working
diligently for a long period of time. Hardworking people keep on
E
13
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Creative: An entrepreneur should be creative and innovative to
stay in the business and in order to have an edge over the other
competitors.
• Has the Initiative: An entrepreneur takes the initiative. You must
put yourself in a position where you are responsible for the failure
or success of your business.
• Profit-oriented: An entrepreneur enters into the world of business
to generate profit or additional income. This shall become the
bread and butter for you and for your family as well. Therefore,
you must see to it that the business can generate income.
PY
• Planning: Planning is strategic thinking and setting of goals
to achieve objectives by carefully maximizing all the available
resources. A good entrepreneur develops and applies step-by-step
plans to realize goals. A good entrepreneur knows that planning is
an effective skill only when combined with action.
O
• People Skills: It’s a very important skill in order to be successful in
any kind of business. People skills refer to effective and efficient
communication and relation to people working in and out of your
C
business. In day-to-day business transactions, you need to deal
with people. A well-developed people skill can spell out the
difference between success and failure of the business.
• Decision Making: Successful entrepreneurs have the ability to think
D
quickly, and to make a wise decision towards pre-determined set
objectives. No one can deny that the ability to make wise decisions
is an important skill that an entrepreneur should possess. Sound
E
decision should spring from given facts and information and should
be towards the pre-determined objectives.
EP
D
14
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Process
In order to firm up what you have learned and to have a better appreciation of
the different entrepreneurial competencies, read the PECs checklist presented,
then answer the same.
PY
Table 1: PECs Checklist
Personal Entrepreneurial Competencies of an Personal Assessment in terms of:
Entrepreneur Strengths Development
Areas
O
Hardworking
- Working diligently
Self-confidence
- Confidence in one’s ability
C
Discipline
- Always stick to the plan
D
Committed
- Solid dedication
E
Interpretation or Insights:
15
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Reflect and Understand
How was your experience in discovering your strengths and the areas to
be developed? Did you gain valuable experience in exchanging insights with your
classmates? To learn more and deepen your understanding of PECs, do Task 5
below.
Task 5: Interview
PY
Interview a successful chef or entrepreneur in your area whose type of business
is related with Cookery. Focus your interview on PECs and other business-related
attributes that helped them become successful. Analyze the result of the interview and
reflect on the similarities and/or differences. Write your answer on a separate sheet of
paper.
O
Sample Interview Guide
C
Name of Proprietor/Practitioner: ____________________________________
Age: ______ Number of Years in Business: ____________
Business Name: ________________________________________________
Business Address: ______________________________________________
D
1. What are your preparations before you engaged in this type of business or
E
job?
2. What are your special skills and characteristics that are related with your
EP
business or job?
3. How did you solve business-related problems during the early years of
your business operation?
4. Did you follow the tips from a successful businessman or practitioner before
you engaged in your business?
D
5. What are your best business practices that you can share with aspiring
students?
6. What are the salient characteristics, attributes, lifestyle, skills and traits that
made you successful in your business or job?
16
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Note: Cull the needed information from the interview to supply answer/s to
Row 1 on the table below. Meanwhile, fill out the second row with your PECs.
Personal
Entrepreneurial Characteristics Attributes Lifestyles Skills Traits
Competencies
Successful
entrepreneur in
the place
PY
My PECs
O
C
Using the information on the table above, analyze and reflect on the similarities
and differences in your answers. Put your reflection on the table below. Write your
conclusion on the space provided.
D
Personal
E
Characteristics
Attributes
D
Lifestyles
Skills
Traits
Conclusion:
17
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Transfer
PY
Using the table below, and the information generated from Task 5 (Interview),
prepare an action plan that indicates how you would align your PECs to the PECs of a
successful entrepreneur in Cookery in your place.
Objective Area
O
Activities Strategies Time Expected
C Frame Outcome
To align my Characteristics
PECs with
D
the PECs of Skills
a successful
entrepreneur
E
in Cookery.
Attribute
EP
Traits
Read and study the following questions below. You may use a separate sheet
of paper or your notebook to write your answers.
1. Why is there a need to compare and align one’s PECs with the PECs of a
successful entrepreneur?
2. How does your action plan help sustain your strong PECs and/or address your
development areas?
3. What plan of action would you prepare to address your development areas?
18
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
ENVIRONMENT AND MARKET(EM)
Content Standards Performance Standards
Module 2
PY
Environment and Market
Introduction
O
People who aspire to start a business need to explore the economic,
cultural and social conditions prevailing in an area. Needs and wants of the people
C
in a certain area that are not met may be considered as business opportunities.
Identifying the needs of the community, its resources, available raw materials, skills,
and appropriate technology can help a new entrepreneur in seizing a business
opportunity.
E D
business environment are those factors that provide possibilities for a business to
expand and make more profits. Constraints, on the other hand, are that factor that
limit the business to grow, hence reduces the chance of generating profit. One of
the best ways to evaluate the opportunities and constraints is to conduct SWOT
(Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats) Analysis.
D
19
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
such as government policies, climate, and trends. Threats relate to what the
competition is doing, as well as legal and other constraints.
Now that you have read some important considerations to look into to
be successful in any business, you are now ready to explore more about the
environment and market.
To begin with, let’s find out the competencies that you will master as you
finish this module.
Objectives
PY
At the end of this module, you are expected to:
• identify what is of “value” to the customer;
• identify the customer to sell to;
• explain what makes a product unique and competitive;
O
• apply creativity and innovative techniques to develop marketable product;
and
• employ a unique selling proposition (USP) to the product and/or service.
C
Now that you have an idea about the things you will learn, take the first challenge
in this module – the pre-assessment.
D
Pre-assessment
Task 1: Multiple-Choice
E
Choose the letter of the best answer. Write your answer on a separate
sheet of paper.
EP
20
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. In this stage, the needs of the target market are identified, reviewed and
evaluated.
A. concept development C. project development
B. economic analysis D. refine specification
6. This is the introduction of new ideas to make the product and services
more attractive and saleable to the target customers.
A. new idea C. product development
B. creativity D. innovation
7. A managerial tool used to assess the environment and to gather important
information that can be used for strategic planning.
A. environmental scanning C. WOTS Analysis
B. SWOT Analysis D. survey analysis
8. A marketing practice of creating name, symbol or design that identifies and
PY
differentiate a product from the other products.
A. product naming C. branding
B. unique selling proposition D. tagline
9. This is a meaningful and unforgettable statement that captures the essence
of the brand.
O
A. product naming C. branding
B. unique selling proposition D. tagline
10. These are the things that people cannot live without in a society.
A. wants C. requirements
B. desires D. needs
C
Task 2: Guide Questions:
D
Read and study the guide questions below. Use a separate sheet of paper to
write your answer.
E
After all the guide questions have been answered and skills
have been mastered, share those with your classmates. Discuss
your insights, personal knowledge, and relevant experiences on the
topic to make it more exciting and engaging.
21
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Goals and Target
After reading and understanding the objectives of this module and having gone through
the pre-assessment and guide questions, you will be asked to set your own personal
goals. These goals will trigger you to further achieve the ultimate objective of this
module. In the end, these goals will motivate you to learn more about Environment
and Market.
PY
Figure 2: Strategic process to achieve the objectives of this module.
O
about environment and market. You will also be given a chance to do practical
exercises and activities to deepen your understanding of the topic.
C
Know
D
Product Development
E
The term development in this module refers collectively to the entire process
of identifying a market opportunity, creating a product to appeal to the identified
market, and finally, testing, modifying and refining the product until it becomes
ready for production.
There are basic, yet vital questions that you can ask yourself about product
development. When you find acceptable answers to these, you may now say that
you are ready to develop a product and/or render services:
22
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Likewise, needs and wants of the people within an area should also
be taken into big consideration. Everyone has his/her own needs and wants.
However, everyone has different concepts of needs and wants. Needs in business
are important things that every individual cannot live without in a society. These
include:
Basic needs are essential to an individual to live with dignity and pride in
a community. These needs can obviously help you generate business ideas and
PY
subsequently to product development.
Wants are desires, luxury and extravagance that signify wealth and
expensive way of living. Wants or desires are considered above all the basic
necessities of life. Some examples of wants or desires: fashion accessories,
O
expensive shoes and clothes, travelling around the world, eating in an expensive
restaurant; watching movies, concerts, having luxurious cars, wearing expensive
jewelries, perfume, living in impressive homes, among others.
C
Needs and wants of people are the basic indicators of the kind of business
that you may engage into because they can serve as the measure of your success.
Some other good points that might be considered in business undertakings are
the kind of people, their needs, wants, lifestyle, culture and tradition, and social
D
orientation that they belong to.
E
developing a product. The succeeding topic will enlighten you about the procedure
in coming up with a product.
D
23
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Identify Establish Generate Select a
Refine
Customer Target Product Product
Specifications
Needs Specifications Concepts Concept
Analyze Perform
Plan
Competitive Economic
Remaining
PY
Products Analysis
Development
Project
O
Concept Development
C
Figure 3: Concept Development
D
The process of product development follows the following steps:
life span of the product, etc.). This stage is very important because this would
determine the product to be produced or services to be provided.
B. Establish Target Specifications: Based on customers’ needs and reviews
of competitive products, you may now establish target specifications of the
prospective new product and/or services. Target specifications are essentially
D
a wish-list.
C. Analyze Competitive Products: It is imperative to analyze existing competitive
products to provide important information in establishing product or services
specifications. Other products may exhibit successful design attributes that
should be emulated or improved upon in the new product or services.
D. Generate Product Concepts: After having gone through with the previous
processes, you may now develop a number of product concepts to illustrate
what types of product or services are both technically feasible and would best
meet the requirements of the target specifications.
E. Select a Product Concept: Through the process of evaluation between
24
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
attributes, a final concept is selected. After the final selection, additional market
research can be applied to obtain feedback from certain key customers.
F. Refine Product Specifications: In this stage, product or services specifications
are refined on the basis of input from the foregoing activities. Final specification
as the results of extensive study, expected service life, projected selling price
and among others are being considered in this stage.
G. Perform Economic Analysis: Throughout the process of product development,
it is very important to always review and estimate the economic implications
regarding development expenses, manufacturing costs, and selling price of the
product or services to be offered or provided.
H. Plan the Remaining Development Project: In this final stage of concept
development, you may prepare a detailed development plan which includes
PY
list of activities, the necessary resources and expenses, and development
schedule with milestones for tracking progress.
O
Finding Value
People buy for a reason. There should be something in your product or
C
service that would give consumers a good reason to go back and buy for more.
There must be something that has to make you the best option for your target
customers; otherwise they have no reason to buy what you’re selling. This implies
further, that you offer something to your customers that they will make them value
D
or treasure your product or service.
The value that you incorporate to your product is called value proposition.
E
Innovation
Innovation is the introduction of something new in your product or service.
This may be a new idea, a new method or a device. If you want to increase your
sales and profit, you must innovate. Some of the possible innovations in your
products are change of packaging, improve taste, color, size, shape and perhaps
price. Some of the possible innovations in providing services are application of
new improved methods, additional featured services and possibly freebees.
25
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Unique Selling Proposition (USP)
Unique Selling Proposition is the factor or consideration presented by a
seller as the reason that one product or service is different from and better than
that of the competitions. Before you can begin to sell your product or service to
your target customers, you have to sell yourself on it. This is especially important
when your product or service is similar to those around you.
USP would require careful analysis of other businesses’ ads and marketing
messages. If you analyze what they say or what they sell, not just their product or
service characteristics, you can learn a great deal about how companies distinguish
themselves from competitors.
PY
Here’s how to discover your USP and use it to increase your sales and profit:
O
are making this product or providing for the target customers to
eventually increase sales and earn profit and not making this
product or service for you. Essential question such as what could
C
make them come back again and ignore competition should be
asked to oneself. Most possible answers may be focused on
quality, availability, convenience, cleanliness, and reliability of the
product or service.
D
• Identify what motivates your customers. It is very important for
you to understand and find out what drives and motivates your
E
• Discover the actual and genuine reasons why customers buy your
product instead of a competitor’s. Information is very important in
decision making. A competitive entrepreneur always improve this
D
26
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Process
Task 3: Interview
PY
the set of questions below. Document the interview and present this to the class.
O
4. Did you consult somebody before you engage in this business? Cite sample
insights that you gained from the consultation.
5. What were your preparations before you started the actual business?
C
6. What creative and innovative techniques did you adopt to your product or
service? What was the effect of the innovative techniques to the sales and
profits of your business?
D
7. What strategy did you consider to have a unique selling proposition to your
product or service?
E
EP
In order to deepen your understanding of the lesson, perform the following tasks:
27
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Prepare a short narrative report about the aforementioned topics. You
may highlight the “aspect” that increases your knowledge of product
development.
Transfer
Using the space and figures below, develop your own concept for your product or
PY
service. Utilize bullets in every stage of product conceptualization in listing important
key ideas.
O
7. Prepare a
Development Plan 1. Identify Customer 2. Target Specifications
- Needs -
- -
C -
-
- -
- - -
- - -
D
- - -
- - -
-
E
3. Analyze a
6. Refine Product Competitive Product
EP
Specification -
- -
- -
- -
- -
D
- -
-
28
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Generating Ideas for Business
PY
1. Examine existing goods and services. Are you satisfied with the product?
What do other people who use the product say about it? How can it be
improved? There are many ways of improving a product from the way it is
made to the way it is packed and sold. You can also improve the materials
used in crafting the product. In addition, you can introduce new ways of
O
using the product, making it more useful and adaptable to the customers’
many needs. When you are improving the product or enhancing it, you
are doing an innovation. You can also do an invention by introducing an
C
entirely new product to replace the old one.
2. Examine the present and future needs. Look and listen to what the
E
3. Examine how the needs are being satisfied. Needs for the products and
services are referred to as market demand. To satisfy these needs is to
supply the products and services that meet the demands of the market.
The term market refers to whoever will use or buy the products or services,
and these may be people or institutions such as other businesses,
establishments, organizations, or government agencies.
29
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Businesses or industries in the locality also have needs for goods and
services. Their needs for raw materials, maintenance, and other services
such as selling and distribution are good sources of ideas for business.
A group of people in your neighborhood may have some special skills that
can be harnessed for business. For example, women in the Mountain
PY
Province possess loom weaving skills that have been passed on from
one generation to another. Some communities there set up weaving
businesses to produce blankets, decorative and various souvenir items for
sale to tourists and lowland communities.
O
Business ideas can come from your own skills. The work and experience
you may have in agricultural arts, industrial arts, home economics, and ICT
classes will provide you with business opportunities to acquire the needed
C
skills which will give you extra income, should you decide to engage in
income-generating activities. With your skills, you may also tinker around
with various things in your spare time. Many products were invented this
way.
D
5. Read magazines, news articles, and other publications on new products and
E
a library where you may browse and surf on possible businesses. It will
also guide you on how to put the right product in the right place, at the right
price, at the right time.
You have to select the most promising one among hundreds of ideas. It
will be good to do this in stages. In the first stage, you screen your ideas to narrow
them down to about few choices. In the next stage, trim down the choices to two
options. In the final stage, choose between the two and decide which business
idea is worth pursuing.
30
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
In screening your ideas, examine each one in terms of the following factors:
PY
Your answers to these questions will be helpful in screening which ones
among your many ideas are worth examining further and worth pursuing.
O
Branding
Branding is a marketing practice of creating name, symbol or designs that
C
identifies and differentiates product or services from the rest. It is also a promise
to your customers. It tells them what they can expect from your product or service
and it differentiates your offerings from other competitors. Your brand is derived
from who you are, who you want to be and what people perceive you to be.
D
Branding is one of the most important aspects of any business. An effective
brand strategy gives you a major edge in increasingly competitive markets.
E
31
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Process
In generating business idea, you should first identify what type of business
is suited to your business idea. You should analyze and scan the potential
environment, study the marketing practices and strategies of your competitors,
analyze the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and the threats in your
environment to ensure that the products or services you are planning to offer will
be patronized within the easy reach by your target consumers.
PY
• Be realistic about the strengths and weaknesses of your business
when conducting SWOT Analysis.
O
• SWOT Analysis should always be specific. Avoid any grey area.
C
• Always apply SWOT Analysis in relation to your competition’ i.e.
better than or worse than your competitions.
• Keep your SWOT Analysis short and simple. Avoid complexity and
D
over analysis.
idea.
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
32
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Opportunities (O) Threats (T)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
Strategies:
PY
• OW - Capitalize on the opportunities to eliminate the internal weakness.
• ST - Maximize on your strengths to eliminate the external threats.
• OT - Take advantage of the available opportunities to eliminate the external
threats.
O
Analysis: C
Activities:
D
My Best Business Idea:
E
EP
33
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Steps in Selecting a Business Idea
• Criteria of a Viable Business Idea
• Benefits of a Good Brand
• Ways on Developing a Brand
Transfer
PY
Task 9: Making My On Logo
O
Direction: Generate a clear and appealing product brand with a logo and a
tagline.
C
D
Logo
E
Logo
EP
Tagline
D
34
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
QUARTER I
Prepare Egg, Cereal, and Starch Dishes
Overview
This quarter will provide you learners the essential knowledge and
opportunities to develop your skills and gain understanding in the preparation,
cooking, presentation, and storing egg, cereal, and starch dishes. You will be able
to know the needed tools and equipment and learn how to clean and sanitize them
PY
after each use. Differentiated activities and hands – on activities are given to afford
you opportunities to transfer what you have learned.
O
Objectives
At the end of the lesson, you are expected to:
•
C
perform Mise en place;
• prepare and cook egg, cereal and starch dishes;
• present egg, cereal and starch dishes; and
D
• store egg, cereal and starch dishes.
E
EP
Pretest 1
A. Multiple Choice.
Read each question carefully. Choose the letter which corresponds to the correct
answer and write it in your test notebook.
35
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. It is a perforated bowl of varying sizes made of stainless steel, aluminum or
plastic used to drain, wash or cook ingredients from liquid.
A. canister C. mixing bowl
B. colander D. soup bowl
3. It is used for turning and lifting eggs, pancakes and meat on griddles, grills,
sheet pans, and the likes and also used to scrape and clean griddles.
A. measuring spoon C. rubber scraper
B. offset spatula D. wooden spoon
4. It is used to scrape off all the contents of bowls and pans from the sides and
fold in beaten eggs in batter or whipped cream.
A. paring knife C. wire whisk
B. rubber spatula D. wooden spoon
5. It is a screen – type mesh supported by a round metal frame used for sifting
PY
dry ingredients like starch and flour.
A. colander C. sieve
B. funnel D. skimmer
6. It is a device with loops of stainless steel wire fastened to a handle. It is
used for blending, mixing, whipping eggs or batter, and for blending gravies,
O
sauces, and soups.
A. fork C. spoon
B. knife D. whisk
C
7. It is a miniature Bain Marie with an upper dish containing indentations each
sized to hold an egg or contains separate device for poaching.
A. egg poacher C. frying pan
B. double boiler D. omelet pan
D
8. It is a chamber or compartment used for cooking, baking, heating, or drying.
A. blender C. mixer
B. burner D. oven
E
11. It is the egg’s outer covering which accounts for about 9 to 12 % of its total
weight depending on egg size.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
12. This is the entrance of the latebra, the channel leading to the center of the
yolk.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
13. It is the yellow to yellow - orange portion which makes up to about 33% of the
liquid weight of the egg.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
36
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
14. A disease that is carried and transmitted to people by food is referred to as
food borne ________________.
A. bacteria C. infection
B. illness D. intoxication
15. It is a disease that results from eating food containing harmful
microorganisms.
A. food borne bacteria C. food borne infection
B. food borne illness D. food borne intoxication
16. It is a disease that results from eating food containing toxins from bacteria,
molds or certain plants or animals.
A. food borne bacteria C. food borne infection
B. food borne illness D. food borne intoxication
17. It is used for mixing creams, butter and for tossing salads.
PY
A. electric mixer C. wire whisk
B. serving spoon D. wooden spoon
18. It is used for preparing meat, chicken, and other grains or legumes, such as
mongo and white beans in lesser time.
A. double boiler C. pressure cooker
B. frying pan D. rice cooker
O
19. It is a long chainlike molecule, sometimes called the linear fraction, and is
produced by linking together 500 to 2, 000 glucose molecules which contributes
to the gelling characteristics to cooked and cooled starch mixtures.
A. amylopectin C. dextrin
C
B. amylose D. mucin
20. This problem is usually encountered when using acid or acid ingredients such
as lemon or vinegar.
D
A. scorching C. thinning of gel
B. skin formation D. weak gelling
E
21. This results when there is too much liquid in relation to the starch.
A. scorching C. thinning of gel
B. skin formation D. weak gelling
EP
22. This problem can be reduced by covering the container of the starch gel with
a waterproof cover.
A. scorching C. thinning of gel
B. skin formation D. weak gelling
23. This can be avoided by temperature control and constant stirring so the starch
D
37
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Give one risk in the preparation and cooking of starch, cereal dishes and other
foods, and give some guidelines pertaining to food safety.
PY
Was not able to explain any guidelines to consider pertaining to
1 food safety related to the given risk.
O
C
E D
EP
D
38
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1 Prepare Egg Dishes
Overview
The egg’s protective coating or mucin layer which aids in the maintenance
of its freshness by covering the small holes in the shell is called bloom. Bloom is
PY
removed during washing so it is not advisable to wash eggs prior to storage unless
it is very dirty. Removal of the mucin layer will expose the holes making the egg
susceptible to bacterial penetration and dehydration, thus hastening deterioration
of its quality.
O
Eggs are produced commercially in farms with a few hundred laying
chickens, or in large laying complexes with thousands of layers. Small and micro-
sized backyard poultry either in small poultry cages or as free range chicken are
C
also producing eggs. Egg is indeed a convenient food for any meal in and out of
the house.
D
Learning Outcome 1:
E
39
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Tools, Utensils and Equipment Needed In Egg Preparation
Kitchen Tools
1. channel knife – a small hand tool used generally in decorative works such
as making garnishes.
2. colander – a perforated bowl of varying sizes made of stainless steel,
aluminum or plastic, used to drain, wash or cook ingredients from liquid.
3. offset spatula – a broad-bladed implement bent to keep the hand off hot
surfaces. It is used for turning and lifting eggs, pan cakes, and meats on
griddles, grills, sheet pans, and the likes and also used to scrape and clean
griddles.
4. pastry brush – a small implement used to brush the surface of unbaked
pastries or cookies with egg white, egg yolk or glaze.
PY
5. rubber spatula or scraper – a broad flexible plastic or rubber scraper, that
is rectangular in shape with a curve on one side. It is used to scrape off all
the contents of bowls and pans from the sides and fold in beaten eggs in
batter or whipped cream.
6. sieve – a screen-type mesh supported by a round metal frame used for
O
sifting dry ingredients like starch and flour.
7. spoons: solid, slotted and perforated – large stainless spoons holding about
3 ounces used for mixing, stirring, and serving. Slotted and perforated
C
spoons are large, long-handled spoons with holes in the bowl used to
remove larger solid particles from liquids.
8. wire whip or whisk – a device with loops of stainless steel wire fastened to
a handle. It is used for blending, mixing,whipping eggs or batter, and for
D
blending gravies, sauces, and soups.
E
Kitchen Utensils
1. egg poacher – A miniature Bain Marie with an upper dish containing
indentations each sized to hold an egg or contains separate device for
EP
poaching.
2. omelet pan – a heavy-based frying usually of cast iron or copper, with
rounded sloping sides used exclusively for omelets and never washed after
used but cleaned with absorbent paper.
3. measuring cup- a kitchen utensil used for measuring liquid or bulk solid
D
40
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Kitchen Equipment
1. oven - a chamber or compartment used for cooking, baking, heating, or
drying.
2. electric mixer - A hand-held mixer which usually comes with various
attachments including a whisk attachment for whisking cream, batters and
egg whites, and sugar.
3. refrigerator - a kitchen appliance where you store food at a cool temperature.
PY
all your cleaning and sanitizing tasks. The program should also help identify your
cleaning needs, set up a master cleaning schedule, select the supplies and tools
to use, and train yourselves to make the best of your skills.
O
Cleaning is the removal of visible oil while sanitizing means reducing the
number of harmful microorganisms by using very hot water or a chemical sanitizing
solution. To be effective, cleaning and sanitizing must be two-step process.
C
Surfaces must first be cleaned and rinsed before being sanitized.
D
There are many cleaning products or agents and a variety of equipment in
the market. Choose the best for your workplace and follow instructions in the label.
E
41
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ware washing
Ware washing is the process of washing and sanitizing dishes, glassware,
flatware, and pots and pans either manually or mechanically. Manual ware washing
uses a three-compartment sink and is used primarily for pots and pans. It may
be used for dishes and flatware in small operations. Mechanical ware washing
requires a dishwashing machine capable of washing, rinsing, and drying dishes,
flatware, and glassware. In large operations, heavy-duty pot and pan washing
machines have been designed to remove cooked-on food.
Manual Dishwashing
Procedure
PY
1. Scrape and pre-rinse.
The purpose of this step is to keep the wash water cleaner longer.
2. Wash.
Use warm water at 1100F to 1200F and a good detergent. Scrub well with a
O
brush to remove all traces of leftover and grease.
3. Rinse.
C
Use clean warm water to rinse off detergent. Change the water frequently,
or use running water with an overflow.
4. Sanitize.
D
Place utensils in rack and immerse in hot water at 1700F for thirty seconds.
(A gas or electric heating element is needed to hold water at this
temperature.)
E
Mechanical Dishwashing
The steps in washing dishes by machine are the same as in the manual
D
methods. Except that the machine does the washing, rinsing, and sanitizing.
Procedure:
42
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 1
A. YES/NO Cards:
Using a 4x6-inch index card, do the activity below:
PY
equipment with label, raise the index card showing YES if the label is
correct and NO if it is wrong.
c. Do the same in the succeeding questions.
O
Performance Activity 1
B. Clean and sanitize tools and equipment by performing the given activity.
C
You will be asked to clean and sanitize the tools and equipment in the
food laboratory. Follow the procedures properly in performing the task.
D
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
4 and equipment and performs the skill without supervision and with
initiative and adaptability to problem situations.
EP
After knowing the needed tools and equipment needed in the preparation
of egg dishes and on how to clean and sanitize them after each use, the next
consideration is to know what makes up an egg and appreciate other things
about egg.
43
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Physical Structure and Composition of Eggs
We normally distinguish 3 parts of an egg: the shell, the egg white, and the egg
yolk, but a closer scrutiny reveals a much more detailed structure of an egg.
Structure
1. Shell
The egg’s outer
covering, the shell,
accounts for about
9 to 12% of its total
weight depending
on egg size. The
shell is the egg’s
PY
first line of defense
against bacterial
contamination. The
shell is produced
by the shell gland
O
(uterus) of the
oviduct, and has an
outer coating, the
C bloom or cuticle. The
cuticle somewhat
seals the pores and
is useful in reducing
D
moisture losses and
in preventing bacterial
penetration of the egg
E
shell.
EP
2. Air cell. This is the empty space between the white and shell at the large
end of the egg which is barely existent in newly laid egg. When an egg is
first laid, it is warm. As it cools, the contents contract and the inner shell
membrane separate from the outer shell membrane to form the air cell.
D
3. Albumen/Egg white. Albumen, also called egg white, accounts for most
of an egg’s liquid weight, about 67%. This is produced by the oviduct and
consists of four alternating layers of thick and thin consistencies. From
the yolk outward, they are designated as the inner thick or chalaziferous
white, the inner thin white, the outer thick white and the outer thin white.
The outer thin white is a narrow fluid layer next to the shell membrane. The
outer thick white is a gel that forms the center of the albumen. The inner
thin white is a fluid layer located next to the yolk. The inner thick white
(chalasiferous layer) is a dense, matted, fibrous capsule terminates on
each end in the chalazae, which are twisted in opposite directions and
serve to keep the yolk centered.
44
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Chalaza.This is the ropey strands of egg white at both sides of the egg,
which anchor the yolk in place in the center of the thick white. They are
sometimes mistaken for egg imperfections or beginning embryos, which of
course they are not. The twist in the chalaza is meant to keep the germinal
disc always on top whichever way the egg may turn. The more prominent
the chalaza, the fresher is the egg.
PY
6. Membranes. There are two kinds of membranes, one just under the shell
and the other covering the yolk. These are the shell membrane and the
vitelline membrane. Just inside the shell are two shell membranes, inner
and outer. The air cell formed due to the contraction of egg as it cools, is
O
found between the two layers of this shell membrane. The outer membrane
sticks to the shell while the inner membrane sticks to the albumen. During
storage, the egg losses water by evaporation, causing the air cell to
C
enlarge. The vitelline membrane is the covering that protects the yolk from
breaking. The vitelline membrane is weakest at the germinal disc and tends
to become more fragile as the egg ages. Every cook has experienced that
the yolk of eggs that are no longer fresh easily break.
D
7. Yolk. The yolk or the yellow to yellow- orange portion makes up about 33%
of the liquid weight of the egg. The egg yolk is formed in the ovary. On the
E
only but when fertilized, it contains the zygote that will eventually develop
into a chick. The yolk material serves as a food source for embryonic
development. It contains all the fat in the egg and a little less than half of
the protein. The main protein in the egg yolk is vitelline, a lipoprotein. It
also contains phosvitin which is high in phosphorus and has antioxidant
D
Composition of an Egg
45
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Nutritive Value of Eggs
Eggs are indeed one of nature’s complete food. It contains high quality
protein with all the essential amino acids, all of the vitamins except vitamin C, and
many minerals. Egg products are particularly good for fortifying food low in protein
quality. Except for mother’s milk, eggs provide the best protein naturally available.
Egg protein is often used as a reference standard for biological values of their
proteins.
PY
Protein (g) 6.3 3.6 2.7
Carbohydrate (g) 0.36 0.24 0.61
Carbohydrate (g) 0.36 0.24 0.61
Total fat (g) 4.8 0.06 4.5
O
Monounsaturated fat (g) 1.8 0 2
Polyunsaturated fat (g) 1 0 0.72
Saturated fat (g) 1.6 0 1.6
Trans fat (g) 0.02
C 0 0.02
Cholesterol (mg) 186 0 184
Choline (mg) 126 0.4 116
D
Riboflavin (mg) 0.2 0.15 0.09
Vitamin B12 (mcg) 0.45 0.03 0.33
E
Folate (mcg) 24 1 25
Vitamin D (IU) 41 0 37
EP
Phosphorous (mg) 99 5 66
Iron (mg) 0.88 0.03 0.46
Zinc (mg) 0.65 0.01 0.39
Calcium (mg) 28 2 22
Sodium (mg) 71 55 8
Potassium (mg) 69 54 19
Magnesium (mg) 6 4 1
Source: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, 2010. USDA
National Nutrient Database for Standard Reference, Release 23. Nutrient Data
Laboratory Home Page: http://www.ars.usdA.gov/nutrientdata
46
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Egg quality
Egg quality has two general components: shell quality (exterior quality)
and interior egg quality. Interior egg quality has direct bearing on the functional
properties of eggs while shell quality has direct influence on microbiological quality
Egg Grading.
Grading is a form of quality control used to classify eggs for exterior and
interior quality. In the Philippines, the grade designations are A, B, C, and D.
Egg Size.
PY
Several factors influence the size of the egg: breed, age of hen, weight,
feed and environmental factors. Native chickens have much smaller eggs than
commercial breeds. Some commercial breeds have bigger eggs than others. Of
the same breed, new layers tend to have smaller eggs compared to older hens.
O
Pullets that are significantly underweight at sexual maturity will also produce small
eggs. Better fed hens lay larger eggs than underfed ones. The environmental
factors that lead to smaller eggs are heat, stress and overcrowding.
C
The egg sizes are jumbo, extra large, large, medium, small and peewee.
medium, large, and extra large are the sizes commonly available.
E D
Weight of 12
840 756 672 588 504 420
eggs in grams
D
Average weight
per egg in 70 63 56 49 42 35
grams
47
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Philippine Standard of Quality for Chicken Eggs
Quality
A B C D
Factor
Moderately
Moderately
stained
Clean Clean stained
Unbroken
Shell Unbroken Unbroken Unbroken
May be
Normal shape Normal shape Slightly
abnormal
abnormal shape
shape
PY
or bubbly
regular regular bubbly
May be weak
Clear Clear and watery
Clear
Reasonably May be slightly Small clots or
O
Firm
Egg White Firm weak spots may be
72 Haugh
60 - 71 Haugh 31-59 haugh present
units or higher
units units Less than 31
C Haugh units
D
Outline may be
well defined. Outline may be
Outlined Outline fairly May be slightly well defined.
E
The unit for describing egg freshness, based on the thickness of the
albumen is called Haugh unit with a symbol of HU named before Raymond Haugh
in 1937.
48
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
A. Minute to Write It
In your test notebook write whether you agree or disagree to the
following statements and justify your answer.
PY
B. Pictorial Report
Make a pictorial report with illustration showing the qualities of a
fresh egg in terms of egg size and grading.
O
C
Your output will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
SCORE CRITERIA
Compiled pictures properly and illustrated the qualities of a fresh egg
5
D
in terms of egg size and grading in a very attractive manner.
Compiled pictures properly and illustrated the qualities of a fresh egg
4
in terms of egg size and grading in an attractive manner.
E
Learning Outcome 2:
Prepare and Cook Egg Dishes
At the end of the lesson, you are expected to:
49
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Market Forms of Egg
There are three market forms of eggs namely: fresh, dried (whole, egg
whites, egg yolks), and frozen (whole, egg whites, egg yolks).
PY
Eggs are also sold in several processed forms: bulk or fluid whole eggs
(which sometimes includes a percentage of extra yolks to obtain a specific blend),
egg whites, and egg yolks. Pasteurized eggs are used in preparations such as salad
dressings, eggnog, or desserts, where the traditional recipe may have indicated
that the eggs should be raw. These products generally are available in liquid or
O
frozen form. Frozen egg products on the other hand are used as ingredients by
food processors. Products containing egg yolk usually have salt, sugar or corn
syrup added to prevent gelation or increased viscosity during freezing. They are
C
packed in 30-lB.containers and in 4-, 5-, 8-, and 10-lB.pouches or waxed or plastic
cartons.
Dried powdered eggs are also sold and may be useful for some baked
D
goods or in certain circumstances. For food service use, they are generally sold in
6-oz. pouches, and 3-lB.and 25-lB.poly packs.
E
Egg is cooked in many ways. It can be the main protein dish; it can be
a main or accessory ingredient in dishes from appetizers to desserts. It can be
cooked by dry heat, moist heat, with or without oil, as simply or as elaborately as
one’s inclination for the moment. Indeed it can be eaten anywhere.
50
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Formation of greenish discoloration at the interface of the yolk and white
when egg is overcooked
• Due to the reaction between the iron in the yolk and the hydrogen
sulfide liberated from the sulfur containing ferrous sulfide.
• Reaction is favored by
• high cooking temperature
• prolonged cooking
• Reaction is prevented by immediate cooling of the egg (e.g.
immersing in cold water) after cooking
Uses of Eggs
A. Cooked and served “as is”, for example:
• in the shell – soft cooked (5 minutes simmering) or hard cooked
(15 minutes simmering)
PY
• poached – cooked in simmering water; addition of salt and vinegar
hastens coagulation
• fried – keep low to moderate temperature
• scrambled – addition of sugar delays coagulation; addition of
liquids and acids decreases coagulation point
O
• omelet
B. Eggs as emulsifier
C
• Lecithin and lysolecithin are responsible for the remarkable ability of
egg yolk to act as an emulsifying agent; both are phosphoproteins
containing polar and non-polar ends such that the polar end holds
water while the non-polar end holds the fat, thus, prevent oil
D
droplets in suspension from coalescing.
C. As binding, thickening agent, and gelling agents
• Eggs are useful as binding, thickening and gelling agents because
E
in a stiffer gel
• Addition of sugar, raises coagulation temperature producing softer,
weaker gel
• Softer gel is produced with the addition of scalded milk and acid
• In cooking custards, Bain Marie, double boiler or steamer is used
D
51
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
yellow with continued beating; volume is increased (but not as
much as when only whites are used); no surface denaturation
occurs.
• With further beating of egg whites, liquid drains out, air bubbles
coalesce and foam breaks.
• The same changes occur when the foam is allowed to stand too
long.
• Maximum stability is reached at soft stage while maximum volume
attained is at stiff stage
PY
soft peaks are formed when beater is lifted
3. stiff foam – peaks hold their shape; when bowl is tipped, it holds, moist and
glossy
4. dry – moistness and glossiness disappear; specks of egg white are seen
O
Factors to be considered in foam formation (leavening agent)
1. Beating time and temperature: as the time of beating increases, both volume
and stability of the foam increases initially, then, decreases; white can be
C
beaten/whipped more readily at room temperature than at refrigerator
temperature – refrigerated eggs are more viscous, thus, hard to beat/whip.
3. Whole eggs or egg yolk require more beating to produce a good foam
E
4. Stored eggs foam faster but produce smaller volume than fresh eggs.
EP
5. Acids (e.g., cream of tartar, 1 t per cup) increase the stability of foams,
but when added too early, delay foam formation (reduced volume) thus,
increases the time necessary for beating
6. Sugar also increases the stability of foams but delays foams formation
D
(reduced volume), thus, it should be added after foaming has started and
soft peaks are formed; sugar retards the denaturation of egg white
9. Type of egg: duck eggs do not foam well because they lack ovumucin
10. Dilution of egg white by water produces bigger volume but lesser foam; this
produces more tender cakes, but in meringues, syneresis occurs.
52
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
11. Applications of foam in cookery
• as leavening (e.g., in angel cake, sponge cake, chiffon cakes)
• as meringue,
a) soft meringue for topping of cream, chocolate, or lemon pie,
requires a proportion of two tablespoons sugar per egg white
b) hard meringue for confections, base of fruit pies or Sans Rival
Cake, requires a proportion of ¼ cup sugar per egg white
• structural and textural agent – tenderness and fluffiness to products,
e.g., fluffy or foamy, soufflé, divinity, foam cakes, popovers
E. As coloring and flavoring agent
Egg Products
PY
1. Balut from duck eggs
2. Pidan eggs
3. Century eggs
4. Pickled eggs
O
Eggs may be cooked in a lot of ways: C
Egg Dishes
Eggs cooked in a shell
D
Hard and soft-cooked eggs are cooked this way. Eggs should only
be simmered and not boiled to prevent overcoagulation which would cause
the eggs to be tough. The optimum cooking time for eggs in shells is 20 to
E
This method involves breaking the egg and using both the yolk and
white during cooking. Poaching, frying, and the process of making scrambled
eggs or omelet are some of the common methods done.
53
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Culinary Uses
At high temperature, the gel toughens. This explains why the white
becomes an opaque mass when cooked at a temperature of 620C. For egg
yolk, coagulation starts at 650C.
PY
Baked products such as sponge cakes, chiffon cakes, meringues, and
soufflés make use of eggs as leavened resulting in a light, airy texture. This
is explained by the incorporation of air during the beating of eggs. Foam is
formed when the albumen surrounds a colloidal system of air bubbles. When
beating eggwhites, overbeating must be avoided as this tends to stretch the
O
albumen and would result in a dry, watery appearance.
Although the term boiled may appear in the name, eggs prepared in
the shell should actually be cooked at a bare simmer for best results. Eggs
are cooked in the shell to make hard- and soft-cooked and coddled eggs.
They may be served directly in the shell or they may be shelled and used to
make another preparation, such as deviled eggs, or as a garnish for salads or
vegetable dishes.
Select a pot deep enough for the eggs to be submerged in water. Have
on hand a slotted spoon, skimmer, or spider to remove eggs from the water
once they are cooked.
54
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
Given the different recipes in preparing and cooking egg dishes, perform the
suggested activities below. Your product and performance will be evaluated
using the given rubric after each activity.
PY
Hard-Cooked Eggs
Makes 10 servings
O
• saucepan
• ladle C
Ingredients Needed:
• 20 eggs
• cold water
D
Procedure:
1. Prepare tools, equipment and food items.
2. Place the eggs in a pot. Fill the pot with enough cold water to cover the
E
eggs by 2in/5in.
3. Bring the water to a boil and immediately lower the temperature to a simmer.
EP
Coddled Eggs. Put cold eggs into already simmering water and simmer for 30
seconds.
Soft-Cooked Eggs. Put cold eggs into already simmering water and simmer for 3 to
4 minutes.
Medium-Cooked Eggs. Put cold eggs into already simmering water and simmer for
5 to 7 minutes.
55
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Poached Eggs
Poached eggs are prepared by slipping shelled eggs into barely simmering
water and gently cooking until the egg holds its shape. The fresher the egg, the
more centered the yolk, the less likely the white is spread and become ragged.
Eggs are most often poached in water, though other liquids, such as red
wine, stock, or cream, can also be used. Add vinegar and salt to the water to
encourage the egg protein to set faster. Otherwise, the egg whites can spread too
PY
much before they coagulate.
O
1. Bright, shiny appearance
2. Compact, round shore, not spread or flattened
3. Firm but tender whites
4. Warm, liquid yolks
C
Poached Eggs
Makes 10 servings
D
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• saucepan
E
• skimmer
EP
Ingredients Needed:
• 1 gal/3.84L water
• 1tbsp/15g salt
• 1 floz./30mL distilled white vinegar
• 20 eggs
D
Procedure:
1. Prepare tools, equipment and food items. Be sure that eggs are chilled until
ready to poach.
2. Combine the water, salt and vinegar, in a deep pan and bring it to a bare
simmer.
3. Break each egg into a clean cup, and then slide the egg carefully into the
poaching water.
4. Cook for 3 to 5 minutes, or until the whites are set and opaque.
5. Remove the eggs from the water with a slotted spoon, blot them on
absorbent toweling, and trim the edges if desired.
6. Serve or chill and refrigerate for later use.
56
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A good-cooked poached egg has a compact, glossy, tender white, and
unbroken, thickened yolk.
Critical factors:
• quality of the egg
• temperature
• amount of liquid
• the way the egg is put in the pan
Fried Eggs
Fried eggs call for perfectly fresh eggs, the correct heat level, an appropriate
amount of cooking fat, and a deft hand. Fried eggs may be served sunny side up
PY
(not turned) or over (turned once). Fried eggs may be basted with fat as they fry.
Using very fresh eggs is the only way to ensure a rich flavor and good appearance
of the finished dish.
O
1. White should be shiny, uniformly set, and tender, not browned, blistered or
crisp at edges. C
2. Yolk should be set properly according to desired doneness. Sunny side-
up yolks should be yellow and well rounded. In other styles, the yolk is
covered with a thin layer of coagulated white.
D
3. Relatively compact, standing high. Not spread out and thin.
4. A fried egg should have a yolk covered with a thin film of coagulated egg
E
5. The egg white should be opaque, firm and tender, not chewy, crisp or
brown.
7. It will provide a fried egg with a slightly crispy, frilly edge; the white will be
set and the yolk soft and runny.
57
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Types of Fried Eggs
1. Sunny side up
Cook slowly without flipping until white is
completely set but yolk is still soft and yellow. Heat
must be low or bottom will toughen or burn before
top is completely set.
2. Basted
PY
Do not flip. Add a few drops of water to
pan and cover to steam cook the top. A thin film
of coagulated white will cover the yolk which should
remain liquid.
O
3. Over easy
C
Fry and flip over. Cook just until the white is
just set but the yolk is still liquid.
E D
EP
4. Over medium
Fry and flip over. Cook until the yolk is
partially set.
D
5. Over hard
Fry and flip over. Cook until the yolk is
completely set.
58
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Fried Eggs
Ingredients Needed:
• fresh egg
• oil or clarified or whole butter, as needed for frying
• salt, as needed
• ground black pepper, as needed
Procedure:
PY
1. Select very fresh grade AA eggs for best results.
2. Break the eggs into a dish.
3. Add about 1/8 inch fat to the sauté pan and set it to a moderate heat. Too
much fat will make the eggs greasy. Less fat will cause them to stick,
unless a pan with the nonstick coating is used.
O
4. When the fat is hot enough, slide the egg into the pan.
5. Tilt the pan, allowing the fat to collect at the side of the pan, and baste the
eggs with the fat as they cook.
C
6. Season the eggs with salt and pepper and serve at once.
Eggs over Easy, Medium or Hard: turn the eggs over near the end of their
D
cooking time with a spatula and cook them on the other side until done as desired,
20 to 30 seconds for over easy, 1 minute for over medium, 2 minutes for over hard.
E
• glossy
EP
• moist
• tender
Common pitfalls
59
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Scrambled Eggs
Scrambled eggs can be made in two ways: the eggs can be stirred
constantly over low heat for a soft delicate curd and a creamy texture, or stirred
less frequently as they cook for a larger curd and a firm texture. Whether prepared
to order or to serve on a buffet line, scrambled eggs must be served hot, fresh and
moist.
Choose eggs that are fresh, with intact shells. Adding a small amount
of water or stock (about 2tsp/10ml per egg) to the beaten eggs will make them
puffier as the water turns to steam. Milk or cream may be used to enrich the
eggs. Scrambled eggs can be seasoned with salt and pepper, and/or flavored or
garnished with fresh herbs, cheese, sautéed vegetables, smoked fish, or truffles.
PY
Eggs can be scrambled in a sauté pan or on a griddle. Nonstick surfaces
make it easy to prepare scrambled eggs with a minimum amount of added fat.
O
Pans used for eggs should be reserved for that use only, if possible. A table fork,
wooden spoon, or spatula is needed for stirring the eggs in cooking.
C
Do not overcook scrambled eggs or hold them too long. Overcooked eggs
are tough and watery and will turn green in steam table. Scrambled eggs should
be soft and moist.
E D
A good scrambled egg must not be tough nor burned but completely
coagulated.
60
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
Given the different recipes in preparing and cooking egg dishes, perform each
of the activity and you will be evaluated using a rubric.
Scrambled Eggs
PY
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• stainless bowl
O
• fork or egg beater
C • sauté pan, steam kettle or tilting skillets
Ingredients Needed:
D
• 30 Eggs
• 1 tbsp/15g salt
E
Procedure:
61
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Omelets
The rolled, or French-style, omelets start out like scrambled eggs, but
when the eggs start to set, they are rolled over. A folded or American style, omelet
is prepared in much the same manner, though it is often cooked on a griddle rather
than in a pan, and instead of being rolled, the American omelet is folded in half.
There are two other styles of omelets, both based upon a beaten mixture of eggs,
cooked either over direct heat or in an oven.
Choose eggs that are fresh, with intact shells. As with scrambled eggs,
the ability of the egg to hold its shape is irrelevant, but fresh eggs are preferable.
Omelets can be seasoned with salt, pepper, and herbs. Clarified butter or oil is the
most common cooking fat.
PY
Omelets may be filled or garnished with cheese, sautéed vegetables
or potatoes, meats, and smoked fish, among other things. These fillings and
garnishes are incorporated at the appropriate point to be certain they are fully
cooked and hot when the eggs have been cooked. Grated or crumbled cheeses
O
will melt sufficiently from the heat of the eggs, and are often added just before an
omelet is rolled or folded. C
Two Factors in Making Quality Omelets
E D
1. High heat.
This is an opposite to the basic principle of low temperature egg
cookery. The omelet cooks so fast that its internal temperature never has
EP
62
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Suggested Omelet Fillings
PY
O
C
D
Creamed or curried chicken Creamed or buttered spinach
E
EP
D
Sautéed onions with or without bacon Sautéed onions and diced potatoes
63
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Plain Rolled Omelet
• small bowls
• sauté pan
• fork
Ingredients Needed:
• 30 eggs
• 1tbsp/15g salt
• 1tsp/2g ground pepper
PY
• 5fl oz. /150 ml water, stock, milk, or cream (optional)
• 2 ½ fl.oz. /175 ml, as needed clarified butter or oil
Procedure:
O
1. Prepare equipment and food items.
2. For each portion, beat 3 eggs well and season with salt and pepper. Add
the liquid, if using.
C
3. Heat a nonstick omelet pan over high heat and add the butter or oil, tilting
the pan to coat the entire surface.
4. Pour the entire egg mixture into the pan and scramble it with the back of
the fork or wooden spoon.
D
5. Move the pan and the utensil at the same time until the egg mixture has
coagulated slightly. Smooth the eggs into an even layer.
6. Let the egg mixture finish cooking without stirring.
E
7. Tilt the pan and slide a fork or a spoon around the lip of the pan, under the
omelet, to be sure it is not sticking. Slide the omelet to the front of the pan
EP
Notes:
D
To give the omelet, additional sheen, rub the surface lightly with butter.
A perfect omelet is fluffy, moist and tender, soft in the center, yellow
in color with no brown at all or just a hint of it, oval in shape, and all in one
continuous piece.
64
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ham and Cheese Frittata
• skillet/non-stick pan
• knife
• non-stick turner
• fork or wire whisk
• small bowl
• chopping board
PY
Ingredients:
O
• 1pc white onion (cut into ring)
• ½ cup stripped sweet bell pepper
• 10pcs lightly beaten egg
•
•
C
¼ tsp ground black pepper
¼ cup shredded cheddar cheese
• ¼ cup evaporated milk
• ¼ tsp iodized salt
D
Procedure:
E
1. In a skillet coated non-stick turner, put little oil, sauté the ham, onion,
tomato, red bell pepper and season to taste.
EP
2. In a bowl, combine the egg and milk, salt, black pepper and pour over
ham mixture. Let eggs set on the bottom, then lift the edges to allow any
uncooked egg to flow underneath. Cover and cook until the eggs are set for
about 3 minutes. Sprinkle with cheese and cut into wedges to serve.
D
65
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Baked Eggs
Place a little butter in a custard cup. Put the cup in 1750C (3500F) oven until
the butter melts.
Break an egg into the cup, and sprinkle with salt and pepper, then top the
egg with a little milk.
PY
Review of Learning Outcome 2
O
Formative Assessment:
C
Label the types of fried eggs.
E D
1. ______________
EP
D
2. _______________
3. ________________
66
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. ________________
5. _________________
PY
Let’s Do It!
O
C
A. Prepare poached egg individually following the procedures below.
D
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• saucepan
E
• skimmer
EP
Ingredients Needed:
• eggs
• distilled vinegar
• water
Procedure:
D
67
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Bring water to a simmer.
PY
6. Remove eggs from pan with slotted
spoon or skimmer.
O
8. Serve immediately.
(To hold for later service, plunge
C immediately into cold water to stop
cooking. Reheat briefly in hot water at
service time).
E D
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking poached egg and
4 performs the skill very satisfactorily without supervision and with initiative
and adaptability to problem situations.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking poached egg
3
and performs the skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision.
D
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking poached egg with
2 minor errors and performs the skill less satisfactorily with some assistance
and/or supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in preparing and cooking poached
1
egg and performs the skill unsatisfactorily.
68
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Present Egg Dishes
Part of serving food is presentation. It should appeal to your mouth, nose,
and eyes. You don’t have to be a trained chef to learn the basics of plating, which
is the art of presenting food in an attractive way.
PY
if you’ve got guests coming over, it’s
nice to have the knives and forks in
the right places.
O
http://startcooking.com/public/images/
C IMGP4143.JPG
tiny.
EP
69
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Just like with centerpieces, it’s good
to have a little bit of height, but don’t
overdo it or your guests won’t know
how to proceed! If you have a mound
of mashed potatoes (mid-height),
you may want to lean your pork chop
against it so that it is standing up
(high), with a row of snow peas (low)
in front. Or, top some rice (low) with
sliced grilled chicken (cut into a few
diagonal slices, and fan them out)
(mid-height) and cross asparagus
over top of it (high).
PY
5. Be odd. Don’t be strange, but things
generally look more interesting when
they’re in sets of odd numbers, rather
than even numbers.
O
C
D
6. Play with color and texture. Even if
you’re just serving Tomato Soup and
E
http://startcooking.com/public/
IMG_4809.jpg
D
70
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
8. Garnish appropriately. Don’t lose sight
of the recipe you made in the first place!
Any garnish on the plate should be
edible and should enhance the flavor of
the main dishes. Grilled salmon might
be served with a lemon wedge, for
example. Garnishes, like the cut-up fruit
with the fried egg below, are also a great
way to add color or texture.
http://startcooking.com/public/
IMG_7835-1.JPG
PY
Different Techniques in Presenting Egg Dishes Attractively.
O
C
E D
EP
Scrambled egg and bun on a plate Boiled eggs on white plate with garnish
with cereal bread
D
Scrambled egg with herbs Fried egg with bacon and toasted bread
71
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
Scrambled egg in Manhattan plate
C Deviled eggs
E D
EP
Stuffed egg Salad egg
D
Poached egg Stir-fried eggs
72
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
73
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)
Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) is a cross-disciplinary area
concerned with protecting the safety, health and welfare of people engaged in
work or employment. Knowing OHS is essential to minimize the hazards and risks
not only to students, trainers and other people within the training institution but also
to others who will be affected.
PY
radiation.
4. Near Miss and Hazardous Incidents and Accident Investigation
5. Report of Notifiable Accidents, Incidents and Dangerous Occurrences
6. First Aid
7. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
O
Basic Food Microbiology C
Certain microscopic organisms, such as bacteria, are able to invade the
human body and cause illness and sometimes death. Because contaminated
foods are the major sources of organisms transmitted to people, it is essential that
food production must have a clear understanding of food microbiology and the
D
conditions involved in it.
What is food borne illness? Food borne infection? Food borne intoxication?
E
Food borne illness is a disease that is carried and transmitted to people by food.
Food borne infection is a disease that results from eating food containing harmful
EP
microorganisms.
Food borne intoxication is a disease that results from eating food containing
toxins from bacteria, molds or certain plants or animals.
74
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Aside from food safety we should also be aware of the different hazards in
our workplace such as kitchen hazards, electrical hazards and others. To avoid or
control these kind of hazards the following should be observed:
PY
surfaces.
9. Wear slip-resistant shoes. Floors should be cleaned often with grease-
cutting solutions.
10. Do not work closely to hot fryers when the floor is wet.
11. Do not spill water or ice into hot oil as this may cause a flare-up.
O
12. Do not overfill or pour excessive amount of frozen fries into deep fryer at
one time.
13. Overfilling causes excessive splashing and bubbling over of hot oil.
C
14. Do not pour excess ice from fry packages into the fryer.
15. Do not overheat the oil; use only manufacturer-recommended cooking
temperatures.
16. Do not move or strain hot oil containers; wait until the oil is cool!
D
17. Extinguish hot oil/grease fires by using a class K fire extinguisher.
E
Preparation/Cooking:
• Keep refrigerated before and after cooking.
• Keep everything clean.
• Use only clean, not cracked eggs.
• Cook thoroughly.
• Wash container used for egg thoroughly.
• Use egg separator
Service/Transport:
• Serve promptly after cooking.
• Keep cold food cold, hot food hot.
• Use ice or cold packs when transporting.
• Avoid eating raw eggs or food that contain raw eggs.
75
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 3
PY
O
1. __________________
C 2. ___________________
E D
EP
3. ___________________ 4. __________________
D
5. _________________ 6. ________________
76
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. ________________ 8. ____________________
PY
O
9. ________________ 10. ____________________
Let’s Do It!
E
EP
Prepare and cook French omelet individually using the given recipe. Present your
product in an artistic way. Your product and performance will be evaluated using
the given rubric.
D
• small bowls
• sauté pan
• fork
Ingredients Needed:
• three eggs
• salt and pepper
• clarified butter
• fillings
77
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Procedure:
PY
4. When the pan is hot, add one tablespoon
clarified butter to coat the inside of the pan.
Give it a second to get hot.
O
C
5. Add eggs to the pan.
E D
78
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
8. For filled omelet, spoon the filling across the
center of the egg.
PY
P E R F O R M A N C E L E V E L
Dimension
Very Needs
Excellent Satisfactory
Satisfactory Improvement No Attempt Points
(4 pts.) (2 pts.)
(3 pts.) (1 pt.) (0 pt.) Earned
1. Use of Uses tools and Uses Uses tools and Uses tools and No attempt
O
tools and equipment tools and equipment equipment
equipment correctly and equipment correctly but incorrectly and
confidently at all correctly and less confidently less confidently
times confidently sometimes most of the time
most of the
times
C
2. Application Manifests Manifests Manifests Manifests less No attempt
of procedures very clear clear understanding of understanding
understanding of understanding the step-by-step of the step- by-
D
the step- by-step of the step- procedure step procedure
procedure by-step but sometimes seeking
procedure seeks clarification most
clarification of the time
E
EP
TOTAL POINTS
79
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Store Egg Dishes
Proper storage of food is very crucial in keeping food safe because the
manner and temperature of storage will affect the food’s susceptibility to bacterial
growth, other contaminants and infestation. Storing food will not improve its quality,
it will only delay the rate of deterioration, and thus the proper period of storage
should also be observed.
PY
enzymatic activity is greater at room temperature.
Keeping eggs as fresh as possible depends on the care taken by the farmer,
wholesaler, and grocer to refrigerate them at all times. After you have chosen your
eggs by size, grade, freshness, and type, proper storage will help maintain their
O
quality.
Kinds of Storage C
• Cold Storage (refrigerated storage, deep chilling, freezer storage) keeping
potentially hazardous foods cold enough to prevent bacteria from growing.
The temperature of the freezer compartment must be at 0°F or less, and
the eggs should be stored in an area of the freezer where there is the least
D
amount of temperature fluctuation.
• Dry Storage should be dry, cool, well-ventilated, free from insects and rodents,
E
for about seven days. Left-over egg yolks and egg whites should be kept in
containers that will prevent drying.
• Keep them in their covered carton (large end up) to preserve moisture and
assure darkness. Do not put them in the egg box at the door of the refrigerator.
• Keep eggs away from strong odors. These can be absorbed through the shells,
which are porous.
• Whole eggs can be beaten slightly and placed in a container with a tight seal
and stored in the freezer for up to one year.
• Egg whites also can be stored for up to a year in a tightly sealed container in
the freezer.
• When storing egg yolks in the freezer, a small amount of sugar or salt should be
added to prevent the yolks from becoming too thick and gelatinous over time.
• Add a pinch of salt per yolk if the yolks will be used for savory dishes, or add
about a ¼ teaspoon of sugar per yolk if the yolks will be used for sweet dishes.
80
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Do not wash eggs before storing them. This destroys the mineral-oil film that
coats the shells and helps keep them fresh.
• Dip the eggs in oil to cover the pores and to delay its deteriorative changes,
reduce mold penetration and retard spoilage.
• Do not keep eggs longer than 2 weeks in the refrigerator.
• Left-over raw yolks can be refrigerated for several days when covered with
water, milk, or oil. Two yolks can be used in place of 1 whole egg in a recipe.
• Left-over raw whites can be stored in a tightly covered plastic or glass container
in the refrigerator for several days or as long as they do not have any odor. They
can also be frozen, although when thawed the white is thinner. However, you
can use them successfully in recipes calling for egg whites.
Carson, Byrta, M.S., et.al., How you Plan and Prepare Meals, third edition
PY
copyright 1980 by McGraw-Hill, Inc. pp. 353 -363
O
Fresh shell eggs Buy best before date
Left-over yolks or whites Within 2 to 4 days
Hard-Cooked eggs
C Within 1 week
Prepared egg dishes Within 3 to 4 days
Pickled eggs Within 1 month
D
Frozen whole eggs (blended) Within 4 months
E
EP
A. Write true if the statement is correct and false if it is incorrect. Write your answer
D
81
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2: Prepare Cereals and
Starch Dishes
Cereals are usually starchy pods or grains. Cereal grains are the most
important group of food crops in the world named after the Roman goddess of
harvest, Ceres. Rice, wheat and corn are the three most cultivated cereals in
the world. Starch on the other hand, exists in nature as the main component of
cereals and tubers. In manufactured and processed foods, it plays an obvious role
in achieving the desired viscosity in such products as cornstarch pudding, sauces,
pie fillings, and gravies.
PY
Starch is the second most abundant organic substance on earth. It is found
in all forms of leafy green plants, located in the roots, fruits or grains. Many of the
food staples of man throughout the world are basically starchy foods, such as
rice, corn, cassava, wheat, potato and others. Starch is the source of up to 80% of
calories worldwide. Besides this significant role, starches have been used in food
O
manufacture, cosmetics, pharmaceuticals, textiles, paper, construction materials,
and other industries.
Objectives
C
At the end of the module the learners are expected to:
Learning Outcome 1:
EP
cereal dishes requires the various tools and equipment below. Each tool must be
used according to its function.
1. Mixing bowl – used when preparing cake mixture, salads, creams, and
sauces.
2. Sifter – used for separating coarse particles of flour, sugar, baking powder,
and powdered ingredients to retain finer textures.
3. Wire whip – used for beating egg whites, egg yolk, creams and mayonnaise.
4. Wooden spoon – used for mixing creams, butter, and for tossing salads.
5. Slotted spoon – used to separate solid particles from soup; also for stirring
purposes, such as making egg white fine in texture for bird’s nest soup and
mock nido soup.
82
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6. Blending fork – used for testing the tenderness of meat, combining big cuts
and particles of meat and vegetables, and for blending other ingredients
with flour.
7. Rubber scraper – used for scraping off mixtures of butter, sugar, and egg
from the sides of the mixing bowl.
8. Strainer – used for separating liquids from fine or solid food particles, such
as coco cream from coconut and tamarind extract.
9. Tongs – used for handling hot foods.
10. Measuring Cups – used for measuring dry and liquid ingredients
11. Measuring spoon – used for measuring dry and liquid ingredients which
require a little amount
12. Sauce pan and pots – used for cooking meat and fish dishes with gravy
and sauce.
PY
13. Kettle and rice cooker – used for cooking rice and other foods.
14. Pressure cooker – used for tenderizing or cooking meat, chicken, and other
grains or legumes, such as mongo and white beans in lesser time..
15. Double boiler – used for preparing sauces which easily get scorched when
cooked directly on the stove.
O
16. Steamer – used for cooking food by steaming.
17. Colander - a perforated bowl of varying sizes made of stainless steel,
aluminum or plastic, used to drain, wash, or cook ingredients from liquid
C
18. Canister - a plastic or metal container with a lid that is used for keeping dry
products
19. Butcher knife – used for cutting, sectioning, and trimming raw meats
20. Channel knife – a small hand tool used generally in decorative works such
D
as making garnishes.
E
Sources of Starch
The parts of plants that store most starch are seeds, roots, and tubers.
Thus, the most common sources of food starch are:
D
83
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Starches are named after its plant sources
• corn starch from corn
• rice starch from rice
• tapioca from cassava
Classification of Starch
Native or Natural starch refers to the starches as originally derived from
its plant source.
PY
Purified starch may be separated from grains and tubers by a process
called wet milling. This procedure employs various techniques of grinding,
screening, and centrifuging to separate the starch from fiber, oil, and protein.
O
The Starch Molecule
Starch is polysaccharide made up of hundreds or even thousands of
glucose molecules joined together. The molecules of starch are two general types,
called fractions: amylose and amylopectin.
C
Amylose is a long chain-like molecule, sometimes called the linear fraction,
and is produced by linking together 500 to 2, 000 glucose molecules. The amylose
D
fraction of starch contributes gelling characteristics to cooked and cooled starch
mixtures. A gel is rigid to a certain degree and holds a shape when molded.
E
Most natural starches are mixtures of the two fractions. Corn, wheat, rice,
potato, and tapioca starches contains 24 to 16 percent amylose, with the remainder
D
being amylopectin. The root starches of tapioca and potato are lower in amylose
content than the cereal starches of corn, wheat, and rice.
84
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
birefringence. The pattern disappears when the starch mixture is heated and the
structure disrupted. The sizes and shapes of granules differ among starches from
various sources, but all starch granules are microscopic in size.
Composition of Starch
Potato Cassava Wheat Cornstarch
Moisture, % 19 13 13
Ash, % 0.4 0.2 0.2
Protein, % 0.06 0.1 0.4
Lipid, % 0.05 0.1 0.8
Phosphorus % 0.08 0.01 0.06
Amylose, % 21 17 28
PY
Micrograph
O
1. Muhrbeck, P. and A.-C.Eliasson. 1987. Influence of pH and ionic strength on the
viscoelastic properties of starch gels- a comparison of potato and cassava starches.
Carbohydrate Polymers 7: 291-300.
C
Starch Properties and Reactions
D
1. Gelatinization.The sum of changes that occur in the first stages of heating
starch granules in a moist environment which includes swelling of granules as
water is absorbed and disruption of the organized granule structure.
E
• increase in clarity
• marked, rapid increase in consistency and attainment of peak
• “dissolution” of linear molecules and diffusion from ruptured
granules.
• with heat removal, retro gradation of mixture to a paste-like mass
of gel.
85
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Different Sweeteners Added to Starch Gel Preparation.
• honey
• molasses
• panutsa or granulated sugar
4. Syneresis. Oozing of liquid from gel when cut and allowed to stand (e.g. jelly or
baked custard). The oozing of liquid from a rigid gel; sometimes called weeping.
PY
• puddings
• jellies
• custards
• gelatin
• agar
O
5. Dextrinization. It is the process of forming dextrin. Dextrins – are partially
hydrolyzed starches that are prepared by dry roasting. In home kitchens,
C
dextrinization is achieved by toasting flour for polvoron, rice flour for kare-kare
sauce, and bread slices for breakfast.
Prolonged heating of starches with acid will promote hydrolysis. This can
happen when cooking an acidic food, such as: Pineapple pie resulting in reduced
viscosity or firmness of the pie filling.
EP
86
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Starches – are added to processed meats (luncheon meats, hot dogs,
sausages, etc.) as a filler, binder, moisture, retainer, and fat substitute.
The quality characteristics of the starch itself depends upon which role or
function it was used.
Cereal
Cereal is any grain that is used for food. Grains especially whole grain are
not just empty calories. These are very valuable and can contribute a great deal to
our health. You should include at least four servings from this food group each day.
Cereal-processed food:
PY
• A whole grain cereal is a grain product that has retained the
specific nutrients of the whole, unprocessed grain and contains
natural proportions of bran, germ and endosperm.
O
riboflavin, and iron.
• A restored cereal is one made from either the entire grain or portions
C
of one or more grains to which there have been added sufficient
amounts of thiamine, niacin, and iron to attain the accepted whole
grain levels of these three nutrients found in the original grain from
D
which the cereal is prepared.
• carbohydrates
EP
• protein
• fat
• vitamins
• minerals
• water
• cellulose or roughage
D
87
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Nutritional Significance of Noodles and Pasta or Alimentary Paste
The physiological function of noodles
and pasta will depend on its starch and other
constituents. Since it is basically a starchy food,
the nutritional significance discussed for starches
also applies. In addition to starches, including
resistant starches I (RS), noodles and pasta may
contain other fibers and some proteins and fat
as well.
Nutritive value:
PY
• water
• protein
• fat
• carbon
• calcium
O
• phosphorous
• thiamin
• riboflavin
• niacin
C
Dried Noodles and Pasta
D
• macaroni • miki
• spaghetti • chicken mami
E
• miswa
D
88
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 1
A B
1. Used for separating coarse particles
PY
of flour, sugar, baking powder, and
powdered ingredients to retain finer
textures.
O
with gravy and sauce.
B. Enumerate the different kinds of starch and give its nutritional value
1. _______________________________________________________
2. _______________________________________________________
3. _______________________________________________________
4. _______________________________________________________
D
C. Give at least three starch properties and reactions and describe these in
one sentence.
1. _______________________________________________________
2. _______________________________________________________
3. _______________________________________________________
4. _______________________________________________________
5. _______________________________________________________
89
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 2:
Prepare and Cook Starch and Cereal Dishes
PY
1. Stress or Other Factors, Stirring Amount and Type. This is a gelatinized
cornstarch dispersion that is likely to break; the granules broke apart due
to stirring.
2. Kind and Amount of Starch. Certain type of starch will influence the
characteristics of the starch paste viscosity and gel strength. Generally
speaking, with “native starches” the greater the amount of amylopectin
O
the more viscous the starch paste, whereas, the greater the amount of
amylase, the firmer the gel is (greater the gel strength).
3. Heating Rate. The faster starch-water dispersion is heated; the thicker it
C
will be at the identical endpoint temperature.
4. Endpoint Temperature
• Each type of starch has a specific endpoint temperature at which it
D
will undergo optimum gelatinization.
• Incompletely gelatinized starch will not attain optimum starch paste
viscosity or gel strength.
E
granule.
5. Cooling and Storage Conditions
• If cooled too fast, the amylase will not have time to form the vital
micelles necessary for the three dimensional structure.
• If cooled too slowly, the amylase fractions will have a chance to
D
align too much and become too close together and the liquid portion
will not be trapped in the micelles. In both instances there will be
weeping and syneresis (the contraction of a gel accompanied by
the separating out of liquid.).
6. Ingredients Added (acid, enzyme, sugar, fat and emulsifiers
a. Addition of acid or enzyme can also cause dextrinization (the process
of forming dextrins).
• Dextrin – a pale powder obtained from starch, used mainly as an
adhesive.
• In making kalamansi pudding or pie, dextrinization of the starch
will occur if the juice is added early in the gelatinization process,
resulting in decreased viscosity and gel strength.
90
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Sugar will delay or inhibit gelatinization of starch.
• Starch pudding with excess sugar will be less viscous or form less
firm gel.
• A cake may collapse as the structural contribution of starch is
delayed or inhibited.
• Decreased starch paste viscosity and gel strength occurs because
the sugar added to water won’t be available for gelatinization. The
kind of sugar used also affects viscosity.
• Fat and surfactants, will serve to “waterproof” the starch granules
so that water will not penetrate as readily during the gelatinization
process.
PY
Functions of Starch Type of Food Preparation Recipes
Thickening sauces, gravies, pie fillings Sauces: sweet sour,
and soups lechon, lumpia, kare-kare,
palabok
O
Pie filling: mango, buko,
apple, pineapple
Soups: arrozcaldo, cream
C soups.
Gelling puddings, kakanin bread pudding, maja
blanca, sapin-sapin,
D
kutchinta, cassava
bibingka
Binding and filling meat loaves and meat luncheon meat, hot dogs,
E
ukoy, tempura
Stabilizing beverages, syrup, salad chocolate drinks, fruits
dressing drinks, yogurt drinks,
cooked dressings
Moisture retaining cake fillings, candies cake rolls, cream fillings
D
91
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Common Problems in Starch Cookery
1. Thinning of Gel. This problem is usually encountered when using acid or
acid ingredients such as lemon or vinegar.
2. Weak Gel. Weak gel results if there is too much liquid in relation to the
starch
3. Skin Formation. Skin formation is due to loss of water from the starch and
protein molecules near the surface of the mixture. To reduce this problem,
cover container of the starch gel with a waterproof cover.
4. Scorching. This can be avoided by temperature control and constant
stirring so the starch granules do not settle at the bottom of the cooking
pan.
5. Raw Starch Flavor. This is due to ungelatinized starch.
PY
Principles in Cooking Cereals
In cooking all cereal products, the following points should be observed:
O
2. Observe carefully the correct proportions of cereal, water and salt.
3. Cook at boiling temperature (212° F.).
4. Watch the time by the clock, and always cook the full time prescribed,
preferably longer.
C
5. Serve attractively.
6. Improper cooking and poor serving are largely responsible for unpopularity
of cereal foods.
D
Cooking Pasta
E
Pasta should be cooked al dente, or “to the tooth”. This means the cooking
should be stopped when the pasta still feels firm to the bite, not soft and mushy.
EP
The pleasure of cooking pasta is its texture, and this is lost if it is overcooked. To
test for doneness, break pasta into small piece and taste it. As soon as pasta
is al dente, cooking must be stopped at once. Half a minute extra is enough to
overcook it.
Cooking times differ for every shape and size of pasta. Timing also depends
D
Fresh egg pasta, if it has not been allowed to dry, takes only 1 to 1 ½
minutes to cook after the water has returned to a boil.
Italian practice is to toss the pasta with the sauce the minute it is drained,
the sauce immediately coats all surfaces of the pasta, and the cheese, melts in the
heat of the boiling hot noodles.
92
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Types of Pasta
PY
http://aboutallpasta.blogspot.com/2015/02/pasta-types-pasta-salad-recipes-types.html
O
C
Pasta Shapes
D
There are hundreds of shapes and sizes of pasta with each shape used
for different preparations based on how the sauce will cling, the texture desired, or
how the product will be used. For example:
E
93
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
this chart helps to emphasize how important it is to follow the recipe and cook pasta
the right way.
PY
When pasta is to be used as an ingredient in a recipe that will be cooked more,
like macaroni and cheese, it should be slightly undercooked. This means reducing the
cooking time by about 2 minutes. Pasta that is not cooked enough is tough and chewy.
Pasta that is overcooked is soft and pasty. When overcooked pasta is combined with
a sauce, it often breaks apart. Handle pasta the right way after it is cooked. Like most
O
foods, pasta is best when it is cooked and served right away. However, it is sometimes
necessary to cook it ahead and hold it until time for service.
with cold ingredients. Drain and cover with cold water just
long enough to cool. The pasta does not need refrigeration
for a short time, it is cooled in the water. When pasta is
EP
94
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Wagon Rotini
11 minutes 8 minutes
Wheels
Linguine Elbow
10 minutes 6 minutes
Macaroni
Rigatoni 10 minutes Noodles 6 minutes
Spaghetti 10 minutes
Let’s Do It!
PY
Given the recipe, by pair or by group, cook pasta following the procedures.
Your product and performance will be evaluated using the given rubric.
O
How to Cook Pasta
Materials needed:
• 500g pasta
• salt
C
• water
• colander
EP
95
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking pasta and
3
performs the skill with some assistance or supervision.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking pasta
2 with minor errors and performs the skill with some assistance and/or
supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in preparing and cooking
1
pasta and was not able to perform the skill.
Risks in the preparation and cooking of starch and cereal dishes and other food
• food handlers;
PY
• kitchen facilities;
• food selection and preparation; and
• safe temperatures.
O
1. Food handlers
• Undergo training on food safety and obtain medical certificates
from the local/provincial/city/municipal health office.
C
• Observe proper hand washing technique
• Wear complete cooking outfit and use disposable gloves for direct
food contact.
D
• Observe personal hygiene at all times.
• Avoid handling food if you are sick.
•
E
2. Kitchen facilities
• Use separate equipment and utensils for handling raw foods
• Sanitize all surfaces and equipment used for food preparation
EP
• Clean thoroughly the cutting-boards and work areas after each use
• Protect the kitchen areas and food from insects, pests and other
animals
• Maintain the highest standards of sanitation in the kitchen at all
times
D
96
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
• Practice segregation of materials
• Store food properly
4. Safe temperature
• Do not leave cooked food at room temperature for more than two
hours
• Refrigerate promptly all cooked and perishable food preferably
below 50C within four hours
• Do not store food too long even in the refrigerator.
• Thaw food inside the refrigerator, not at room temperature.
• Check internal temperature during cooking to assure proper end-
point time and temperature has been met to at least 700C/1650F
• Reheat cooked food thoroughly to 700C/1650F within two hours
PY
Enhancement Activity
O
C
A. Collect at least 20 different recipes of starch and cereal dishes and
compile it using any kind of paper, any decorating materials, glue, and
coloring materials.
D
Your output will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
E
SCORE CRITERIA
Compiled properly 20 or more recipes of starch and cereal
5
dishes in a very attractive manner
EP
97
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
B. Given the recipe, prepare and present Fettuccine Alfredo following the
procedure.
Ingredients:
PY
• 1 cup heavy cream
• 2 tbsp butter
• 1 ½ lb fresh fettuccine
• 1 cup heavy cream
• 6 tbsp freshly grated parmesan
O
cheese
• salt to taste
• pepper to taste
Procedure:
C
1. Combine the cream and butter in a sauté pan. Bring to simmer, reduce by
¼ and remove from heat.
2. Drop the noodles into boiling salted water, return to a full boil and drain.
D
Undercook slightly the noodles because they will cook further in the cream.
3. Put the noodles in the pan with hot cream and butter. Toss the noodles with
E
two forks until they are well coated with the cream, over low heat.
4. Add the remainder of the cream and cheese and toss to mix well.
5. Add salt and pepper to taste.
EP
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking starch dish and
4 performs the skill without supervision and with initiative and adaptability to
problem situations.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking starch dish and
3
performs the skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking starch dish
2 with minor errors and performs the skill satisfactorily with some assistance
and/or supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in preparing and cooking starch
1
dish and performs the skill unsatisfactorily.
98
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Present Starch and Cereal Dishes
Techniques in Preparing Pasta before Plating
1. Pasta is best if cooked and served immediately. Try to cook pasta upon
order.
2. If pasta is to be served immediately, just drain and do not rinse in cold
water.
3. If pasta is to be used cold in salad, it is ready to be incorporated in the
recipe as soon as it has cooled.
4. If pasta is to be held, toss gently with a small amount of oil to keep it from
sticking.
5. Measure portions into mounds on trays. Cover with plastic film and
PY
refrigerate until service time.
6. To serve, place the desired number of portions in a china cap and immerse
in simmering water to reheat. Drain, plate, and add sauce.
O
C
E D
EP
D
99
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
SCORE CRITERIA
PY
Created an album of 20 starch and cereal dish
5 presentations, with its recipes, in a very attractive
manner
Created an album of 16-19 starch and cereal dish
O
4 presentations, with its recipes, in an attractive
manner C
Created an album of(10-15) starch and cereal dish
3
presentations, with its recipes in a simple manner
D
Created an album of (6-9) starch and cereal dish
2
presentations in a simple manner
E
manner
D
100
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
B. Given the needed tools and equipment, prepare and present Baked
Lasagna following the recipe below:
Baked Lasagna
PY
Ingredients:
• ¾ lb. ricotta cheese
• 2 tbsp. parmesan cheese,
O
grated
• 1 pc egg
• salt to taste
C •
•
pepper to taste
1 lb. lasagna
• 6 cups meat sauce
• ¾ lb. mozzarella cheese,
D
shredded
• 4 tbsp. parmesan cheese,
grated
E
Procedure:
1. Mix the ricotta, parmesan and eggs then season to taste with salt and
EP
pepper.
2. Cook lasagna noodles. Lay them out in a single layer on oiled sheet pans.
3. Ladle a little meat sauce into the pan. Spread it across the bottom.
D
4. Arrange a layer of noodles in the pan. Add a layer of ricotta mixture, a layer
of noodles, a layer of sauce and a layer mozzarella.
5. Continue making layers of noodles, ricotta, sauce and mozzarella until all
ingredients are used. Top with parmesan cheese.
6. Bake at 375°F (190°C. for about 30-45 minutes. Cover lightly with foil, then
remove after 15 minutes of baking time.
101
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
PY
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
O
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
D
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
E
102
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
PY
include other ingredients. Your product, performance and presentation will be
rated using the given rubric.
O
• rolling pin
• mixing bowl
• measuring cup/spoon
• sharp cutter/knife
C
Ingredients:
• 2 cups all-purpose flour
D
• ¼ tsp salt
• 3 pcs egg
• 1 tbsp milk
E
Procedure:
1. Combine 2 cups all-purpose flour and 1/4 teaspoon salt on pastry board,
culling board, or countertop; make well in center. Whisk 3 eggs, 1 tablespoon
milk, and 1 teaspoon olive oil in small bowl until well blended; gradually
pour into the flour mixture while mixing with fork or fingertips to form ball of
D
dough.
103
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Knead the dough until it becomes smooth and elastic.
5. Unwrap dough and knead briefly (as described in step 2) on lightly floured
surface. Using lightly floured rolling pin, roll out dough to 1/8-inch-thick
circle on lightly floured surface. Gently pick up dough circle with both
hands. Hold it up to the light to check for places where dough is too thick.
Return to board. Let rest until dough is slightly dry but can be handled
without breaking.
PY
8. Slide rolling pin out; press dough roll gently with hand and cut into strips of
desired width with sharp knife. Carefully unfold strips.
O
10. Pasta can be dried and stored at this point. Hang strips over pasta rack
C
or clean broom handle covered with plastic wrap and propped between
two chairs. Dry for at least 3 hours; store in airtight container at room
temperature for 4 days. To serve, cook pasta in large pot of boiling salted
water 3 to 4 minutes just until al dente. Drain well.
D
104
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 4:
Store Starch and Cereal Dishes
Introduction
Proper storage of food is very crucial in keeping food safe because the
manner and temperature of storage will affect the food’s susceptibility to bacterial
growth, other contaminants, and infestation. Storing food will not improve its quality,
it will only delay the rate of deterioration, and thus, the proper period of storage
should also be observed.
FIFO (First In, First Out) in storing food is very important. Though it is a
long-time method in store-keeping where the first food stored should be the first
PY
food to be out from the storage it is high time to make it a habit or put into practice.
Write the expiry date, date received and date of storage to the food package and
regularly check the expiration date.
O
How to Store Pasta Noodles
Pasta is stored in airtight containers.
C
Pasta noodles are usually sold dry at the grocery store, allowing you to
store them with other staples in your pantry. Dry noodles have a long storage life
when properly packaged. Improper storage causes the pasta to become moist,
which leads to mildew. Even without moisture, pasta can become stale if it’s not
D
stored correctly. Proper storage ensures your pasta to always taste its best.
1. Dry Pasta
E
• Remove the pasta from the store packaging if the noodles come in
a box or other non-airtight container.
EP
• Seal the bag or screw the lid on tightly. Store the pasta in a cool,
D
dry place. Dry pasta stores indefinitely, but should be used within
two years to prevent loss of flavor. Store dried egg noodles for up
to six months.
105
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Cooked Pasta
• Pour the noodles into a colander. Allow as much moisture as
possible to drain. Noodles left in standing water become overly
soft and mushy.
• Sprinkle 1 tsp. salad oil over the noodles. Toss the pasta so the
noodles are evenly coated in the oil. Salad oil prevents the pasta
from sticking together.
PY
separate from the pasta and can be stored for 6 or 7 days. This
prevents the pasta from soaking up too much flavor and oil from the
sauce, which causes the taste of the pasta to be drowned out. If the
pasta is stored together with the sauce, it should be eaten within 1
or 2 days to limit the amount of sauce that is absorbed. If cooked
O
pasta is not going to be used within the suggested time period,
it should be frozen and then it can be stored for approximately 3
months. Frozen cooked pasta should be thawed in the refrigerator
C
and not on the kitchen counter.
To store, cook the pasta as you normally would and then rinse with cold water
and allow it to drain well.
E D
106
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
If storing sauced pasta, eat within 1
to 2 days to prevent it from absorbing
too much sauce.
PY
Cooked lasagna and baked pasta dishes can be refrigerated or frozen in
the same manner as plain cooked pasta. The lasagna and casseroles should be
first cut into individual servings before placing them in a sealed bag or container.
This will make it easier when reheating.
O
or pasta dish to refrigerate
C
or freeze, it can be left in the
baking dish and tightly covered
before storing.
E D
The lasagna and baked pasta dishes can be refrigerated for 3 or 4 days
or they can be placed in a freezer and kept for approximately 3 months. If frozen,
EP
the pasta dish should be thawed in the refrigerator and not on the kitchen counter.
3. Fresh Pasta.
D
Fresh pasta should ideally be used on the same day as manufactured. This
is not always possible, but if it is used within the next two days it will give adequate
results. After this it tends to crack through excess drying. It must be stored, keep
it well-covered in the fridge, to minimize the risk of this happening. Frozen filled
pastas will keep for up to three months if held at -18°C or lower.
Fresh pasta can be stored in the refrigerator for 2 or 3 days. If the pasta
will not be used within that time, it can be frozen and stored in the freezer for 2
to 3 months. Homemade pasta can be stored in the refrigerator for 1 or 2 days or
frozen for 2 to 3 months. Homemade pasta can also be allowed to dry thoroughly
and then placed in a plastic bag or airtight container. The length of time it will take
to dry will vary depending on the type of pasta and its size, shape and thickness.
If dried completely, the pasta can then be stored in a cool dry place for a couple of
107
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
months. If you are going to use the pasta on the same day as it is made, you can
allow it to dry on a clean towel for a couple of hours before you cook it unless it is
stuffed pasta. Stuffed pasta, such as ravioli, should be cooked within half an hour,
otherwise it will begin to discolor and become damp.
PY
4. Frozen pasta does not have to be thawed before it is cooked. Just place the
frozen pasta into boiling water and reheat it. It will need to cook a little longer
than unfrozen pasta.
O
Tips and Warnings
• Store pasta sauce separate from the noodles, otherwise the noodles
will become mushy.
C
• You can freeze cooked pasta but it may be too soft once thawed. Use
frozen pasta in baked dishes so the softer texture is not noticeable.
D
SCORE CRITERIA
5 Done creatively and neatly showing much relevance to the given topic
D
4 Done creatively and neat enough with relevance to the given topic
3 Done creatively and neat enough but no relevance to the given topic
2 Done simply and neat enough but not so relevant to the given topic
1 Done poorly with erasures and irrelevant to the given topic
Prepare and cook any cereal dish from among those recipes which you have
compiled in the previous activity.
108
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
P E R F O R M A N C E L E V E L
Dimension
Very Needs
Excellent Satisfactory
Satisfactory Improvement No Attempt Points
(4 pts.) (2 pts.)
(3 pts.) (1 pt.) (0 pt.) Earned
1. Use of Uses tools and Uses Uses tools and Uses tools and No attempt
tools and equipment tools and equipment equipment
equipment correctly and equipment correctly but incorrectly and
confidently at all correctly and less confidently less confidently
times confidently sometimes most of the time
most of the
times
PY
Application very clear clear understanding understanding
of understanding understanding of the step-by- of the step- by-
procedures of the step- by- of the step- step procedure step procedure
step procedure by-step but sometimes seeking
procedure seeks clarification most
clarification of the time
O
Works Works Works Works No attempt
independently independently independently independently
with ease and with ease and with ease and but with
confidence at all confidence confidence assistance from
times
time
C
most of the sometimes others most of
the time
3. Safety Observes safety Observes Observes safety Not observing No attempt
work habits precautions at safety precautions safety
D
all times precautions sometimes precautions
most of the most of the time
time
4. Final Output is very Output is very Output is Output is not so No attempt
E
standard.
5. Time Work completed Work Work completed Work completed No attempt
management ahead of time completed ___(mins./ ___(mins./hours/
within allotted hours/days) days) beyond
time beyond
D
TOTAL POINTS
109
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s See How Much You Learned
Posttest 1
A. Multiple Choice
Read each question carefully. Choose the letter which corresponds to the correct
answer and write it in your test notebook.
1. Knife is chef’s best buddy. It is the busiest tool being used by people
assigned inside the kitchen. Which of the following knives is used for
decorative works such as garnishes?
PY
A. bread knife C. channel knife
B. butcher knife D. paring knife
2. It is a perforated bowl of varying sizes made of stainless steel, aluminum or
plastic used to drain washed or cooked ingredients from liquid.
A. canister C. mixing bowl
O
B. colander D. soup bowl
3. It is used for turning and lifting eggs, pan cakes and meats on griddles,
grills, sheet pans, and the likes and also used to scrape and clean griddles.
A. measuring spoon
C
C. rubber scraper
B. offset spatula D. wooden spoon
4. It is used to scrape off all the contents of bowls and pans from the sides and
fold in beaten eggs in batter or whipped cream.
D
A. paring knife C. wire whisk
B. rubber spatula D. wooden spoon
5. It is a screen – type mesh supported by a round metal frame used for sifting
E
B. funnel D. skimmer
6. It is a device with loops of stainless steel wire fastened to a handle. It is
used for blending, mixing, whipping eggs or batter, and for blending gravies,
sauces, and soups.
A. fork C. spoon
B. knife D. whisk
D
110
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
10. A dishwashing machine capable of washing, rinsing, and drying dishes,
flatware, and glassware.
A. hand washing C. mechanical ware washing
B. manual ware washing D. washing machine
11. It is the egg’s outer covering which accounts for about 9 to 12 % of its total
weight depending on egg size.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
12. This is the entrance of the latebra, the channel leading to the center of the
yolk.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
13. It is the yellow to yellow - orange portion which makes up to about 33% of
PY
the liquid weight of the egg.
A. chalaza C. shell
B. germinal disc D. yolk
14. A disease that is carried and transmitted to people by food is referred to as
food borne ________________.
O
A. bacteria C. infection
B. illness D. intoxication
15. It is a disease that results from eating food containing harmful
microorganisms.
A. food-borne bacteria
C C. food-borne infection
B. food-borne illness D. food-borne intoxication
16. It is a disease that results from eating food containing toxins from bacteria,
D
molds or certain plants or animals.
A. food-borne bacteria C. food-borne infection
B. food-borne illness D. food-borne intoxication
E
17. It is used for mixing creams, butter and for tossing salads.
A. electric mixer C. wire whisk
B. serving spoon D. wooden spoon
EP
18. It is used for preparing meat, chicken, and other grains or legumes, such
as mongo and white beans in lesser time.
A. double boiler C. pressure cooker
B. frying pan D. rice cooker
19. It is a long chainlike molecule, sometimes called the linear fraction, and
D
111
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
22. This problem can be reduced by covering the container of the starch gel
with a waterproof cover.
A. scorching C. thinning of gel
B. skin formation D. weak gelling
23. This can be avoided by temperature control and constant stirring so the
starch granules do not settle at the bottom of the cooking pan.
A. scorching C. thinning of gel
B. skin formation D. weak gelling
24. Food stuff has a required shelf life and storing requirement. Which of the
following food item can be stored in the refrigerator for 2 or 3 days?
A. cooked pasta C. fresh pasta
B. dried pasta D. frozen pasta
25. FIFO stands for ___________
PY
A. Fan In Fan On C. First In First Out
B. First In Fight Out D. Fit In Fit Out
B. Give one risk in the preparation and cooking of starch, cereal dishes and
O
other foods and give some guidelines pertaining to food safety. (26-30)
Your answer will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
C
SCORE CRITERIA
4 Explains very clearly the complete guidelines to consider
pertaining to food safety related to the given risk.
3 Explains clearly the complete guidelines to consider
D
pertaining to food safety related to the given risk.
2 Explains partially the guidelines to consider pertaining to food
E
112
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Quarter 2
Prepare Vegetable and Seafood Dishes
Overview
This quarter will guide you, learners to acquire the essential knowledge and
competencies and develop your skills with understanding in the preparation, cooking,
presentation, and storing vegetables and seafood dishes. Products/performances
required in every activity will help you to practice gained understanding.
PY
Objectives
At the end of the lesson, you are expected to:
1. perform Mise en place;
2. prepare and cook vegetable and seafood dishes;
O
3. present vegetable and seafood dishes; and
4. store vegetable and seafood dishes.
C
E D
Pretest 2
A. Multiple Choice
Read the following questions carefully and choose the letter that best describes the
D
113
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Which of the following is cooked by placing blanched or raw vegetables
in the pan, adding liquid (stock, water, wine) then covering and cooking it
slowly?
A. boiling C. braising
B. baking D. sautéing
5. Which fat soluble compound is responsible for the green coloring of plants?
A. anthocyanins C. chlorophyll
B. carotenoids D. lycopene
6. Mrs. Cabrillas needs more supply of Vitamin A. Which of the following will
she eat to give her the nutrient she needs?
A. alugbati C. lettuce
B. potatoes D. saluyot
7. Which of the following plating styles is not a classic arrangement?
PY
A. The starch or vegetable item is heaped in the center while the main
item is sliced and leaned up against it.
B. The main item in the center, with vegetable distributed around it.
C. The vegetable item in front and main item, starch item and garnish at
the rear.
O
D. The main item is in the center with neat piles of vegetables carefully
arranged around.
8. Chef Shaneshan will cook chopsuey. She is about to remove the hard core
A. butcher knife
C
of a cabbage. Which of the following knives will she use?
C. cutting knife
B. channel knife D. paring knife
9. What kind of knife is used in removing the hard core of a cabbage?
D
A. butcher knife C. cutting knife
B. channel knife D. paring knife
10. At what temperature in a dry, dark place should potatoes and onions be
E
stored?
A. 50 – 650F C. 60 – 850F
B. 40 – 450F D. 70 – 950F
EP
114
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
16. Which of the following is a freshwater fish?
A. bluefish C. grouper
B. cat fish D. sole
17. What market form is produced when both sides are still joined but bones
are removed?
A. Butterfly C. fillet
B. Drawn D. steak
18. Which of the following is the second step in scaling whole fish?
A. Begin to rake the scales from the tail towards the head.
B. Remove the scales on both sides of the fish.
C. Hold the fish down firmly with your hand near its head.
D. Lay your fish flat on the board.
19. Which of the following is the third step in opening an oyster?
PY
A. Cut muscle from bottom cup.
B. Insert oyster knife at hinge slowly but firmly
C. Push knife into oyster and slice muscle from top shell
D. Twist knife handle to open the oyster.
20. Which of the following is a characteristic of fresh fish?
O
A. With fresh and foul odor
B. Eyes are dull, shiny and bulging
C. Gills are pink or red
D. Flesh shrink when pressed
C
21. How many colors are suggested on a plate to make it balanced?
A. four to five C. three to four
B. one to two D. two to three
D
22. Which of the following seafoods is cooked with just enough to heat to keep
it juicy and plump?
A. fat fish C. flat fish
E
B. Cream D. sauce
24. What cooking method is suited to fat fish?
A. Baking C. deep -frying
B. Boiling D. sautéing
25. Which is basted to baked lean fish to help prevent it from drying up?
D
115
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1 Prepare Vegetable Dishes
Overview
Vegetables are plants or parts of plants like leaves, fruits, tubers, roots,
bulbs, stems, shoots, and flower used in a dish either raw or cooked. Vegetables
give color, texture and flavor to our meals. They also give vitamins and minerals.
Vegetables provide nutrients vital for health and maintenance of your body.
Eating vegetables provides health benefits to people like reduced risk of some
chronic diseases including heart attack and stroke, protect them against certain
types of cancers, reduce obesity and type two diabetes, lower blood pressures,
reduce the risk of developing kidney stones and help decrease bone loss.
PY
Vegetables are important sources of many nutrients, including potassium,
dietary fiber, folate (folic acid), vitamin A, and vitamin C.
• Diets rich in potassium may help maintain normal blood pressure. Vegetable
sources of potassium include sweet potatoes, white potatoes, white beans,
O
tomato products (paste, sauce, and juice), beet greens, soybeans, lima
beans, spinach, lentils, and kidney beans.
• Dietary fiber from vegetables, as part of an overall healthy diet, helps
C
reduce blood cholesterol levels and may lower risk of heart disease. Fiber
is important for proper bowel function. It helps reduce constipation and
diverticulosis. Fiber-containing foods such as vegetables help provide a
feeling of fullness with fewer calories.
D
• Folate (folic acid) helps the body form red blood cells. Women of childbearing
age who may become pregnant should consume adequate folate from
foods, and in addition, 400 mcg of synthetic folic acid from fortified foods or
E
supplements. This reduces the risk of neural tube defects, spinal bifida, and
anencephaly during fetal development.
EP
• Vitamin A keeps eyes and skin healthy and helps to protect against infections.
• Vitamin C helps heal cuts and wounds, and keeps teeth and gums healthy.
Vitamin C aids in iron absorption.
D
Learning Outcome 1:
Perform Mise En Place
116
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Classifications of Vegetables
A. According to parts of plants
1. Gourd family
PY
- beans, peas, corn, okra
O
C
3. Fruit Vegetables
- avocado, eggplant, sweet pepper, tomato
E D
EP
117
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. Cabbage family
- cabbage, broccoli, cauliflower, Brussels sprouts, bokchoy
6. Onion family
- onion, scallion, leek, garlic, shallot
PY
7. Leafy greens
O
- spinach, lettuce
C
E D
9. Mushrooms
118
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. According to Chemical Composition
1. Carbohydrate-rich vegetables – seeds, roots, tubers
2. Protein-rich vegetables –legumes, peas, beans
3. Fat-rich vegetables – nuts, olives, avocado
4. High moisture content – mushroom, tomatoes, radish, green leafy
vegetables
1. Vitamin A-rich vegetables – green leafy and yellow fruits and vegetables
2. Vitamin C-rich vegetables – yellow vegetables
PY
3. Vitamin B (complex) – legumes, peas, beans
O
paring knife used in paring
C
E D
119
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
bowls used to hold vegetables
PY
sauté pan for sautéing or stir frying
O
vegetables
C
D
steamer for steaming vegetables
E
EP
120
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Flavor Components of Vegetables
1. Sugar –
Fructose – the natural sugar that provides the sweetness in vegetables.
3. Sulfur compounds –
Give the characteristic strong flavor and odor of some vegetables like
onions, leeks, garlic, chives, cabbage and broccoli.
Color Components
1. Chlorophyll – a fat soluble compound responsible for the green color of plants.
PY
When combined with acid, it forms pheophytin which produces an olive
green color.
When combined with alkali, it forms chlorophyllins which
produces a more intense green color. The addition of baking soda in
cooking, which results in having brighter green color, is an example.
O
2. Carotenoids – the yellow, orange to red soluble pigments found in plants.
a. beta carotene from carrots and squash
b. lycopene, from tomatoes
3. Flavonoids
C
a. Anthoxanthin – responsible for the yellow pigments
b. Anthocyanins – responsible for red and blue to violet pigments (beets)
tube, eggplants
D
Factors to consider in choosing good quality vegetables
E
1. Freshness
Fresh vegetables should be
crisp and bright in colors.
EP
D
121
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. No mechanical damage or injury.
PY
5. Variety of texture and sometimes flavor.
O
C
Vegetables are good sources of food nutrients that are very important in everyday
meals.
D
Nutritional Value of Vegetables
1. Vitamin A
E
Green leafy
vegetables are sources of
EP
vitamin A.
Example:
• alugbati
• ampalaya leaves
D
• kalabasa leaves
• malunggay
• petchay
• sili leaves
122
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Vitamin C
Example:
• cabbage – type
vegetables
• bell peppers
• lettuce
• potatoes
• dark green and
yellow vegetables
3. Vitamin B – complex
PY
Beans and leafy
greens are rich sources of
vitamin B – complex
Example:
O
• ampalaya tops
• kulitis
• pepper leaves
•
•
saluyot
dried beans
C
D
4. Complex carbohydrates
Complex carbohydrates are carbohydrate molecules with more than 20 –
sugar residue. They are called as polysaccharides.
E
Functions of Carbohydrate:
EP
Examples:
• wheat bran
• whole grain breads and cereals
• cabbage
• carrots
• Brussels sprouts
123
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Preparing Fresh Vegetables
1. Washing
Wash all vegetables thoroughly
Scrub well unpeeled vegetables, like potatoes for baking
Wash green leafy vegetables in several changes of cold water
After washing, drain well and refrigerate lightly covered to prevent drying.
PY
2. Soaking
Do not soak vegetables for long periods to prevent flavor and nutrient loss.
Cabbage, broccoli, cauliflower may be soaked for 30 minutes in cold salted
water to eliminate insects.
O
Limp vegetables can be soaked briefly in cold water to restore crispness.
C
E D
124
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Basic Cutting Techniques
1. chopping – done with a straight, downward cutting motion.
2. chiffonade (shredding) – making very fine parallel cuts.
3. dicing – producing cube shapes
4. diamond (lozenge) – thinly slicing and cutting into strips of appropriate
width
5. mincing – producing very fine cut usually for onions and garlic
6. julienne and baton net – making long rectangular cut
7. pays anne (fermi ere) – making curved or uneven cuts of the same thickness
8. rondelle – making cylindrical cut
9. bias – making a diagonal cut
10. oblique or roll cuts – making a diagonal cut by rolling the long cylindrical
vegetables
PY
Apply safe and accurate cutting techniques in preparing vegetables
according to enterprise standards.
125
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Slice off the top one inch
PY
at the base, including stalk and continue
to rub with lemon
O
C 6. Cut the artichoke in half
E D
126
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
9. Cut the artichokes lengthwise into sizes
that suit your recipe and place it in the
water bath with lemon before cooking.
B. Trimming Asparagus
PY
1. Hold a spear of asparagus in each
hand
O
C
E D
127
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Trim or cut them into one inch
length for cooking
C. Preparing Avocados
PY
1. Grip the avocado gently on one
side with one hand, cut the avocado
O
lengthwise around the seed
C
D
2. Open the avocado into halves to
expose the seed
E
EP
spoon or scooper
128
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Gently tap the seed with a knife
and twist to get the seed out and
discard.
PY
spoon or scooper
O
C 6. Slice avocado into segments
D
129
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Use a paring knife to remove the
hard core. Repeat with remaining
cabbage quarters.
PY
to your desired thickness.
O
E. Peeling and Crushing Garlic
C
1. To remove the paper skin of garlic,
cut off the base of the clove.
E D
EP
130
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Cut the garlic into slices as thin as
possible.
PY
5. From garlic slices, mince it.
O
C 6. Crush the garlic as you want.
E D
F. Cleaning leeks
EP
131
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Slice them crosswise.
PY
O 4. Transfer them to a bowl of cold
C water and swish them around a few
times.
D
5. With hands loosely cupped, lift the
leeks out of the bowl and place
E
132
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 1
Formative Assessment
Identify and classify the given pictures. Write your answer in the appropriate column.
Name Classification
PY
O
1.
C
D
2.
E
EP
3.
D
4.
5.
133
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6.
7.
PY
8.
O
C
9.
E D
EP
10.
D
134
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Identify the different methods of preparing fresh vegetables. Write the correct
method on the space provided.
1.______________ 3. ______________
2.______________
PY
O
4. ______________
C 5. _____________
E D
EP
6. _____________ 7. _____________
D
135
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 2:
Prepare Vegetable Dishes
Effects of Cooking Vegetables
1. Changes in texture
Fibers are either softened or toughened.
a. Cellulose and hemicellulose – heating generally softens fibers
b. Addition of acid toughen fibers
c. Addition of alkali like baking soda soften hemicellulose
d. Addition of lime causes firmness or delay softening due to the reaction
of calcium from lime (“apog”)
2. Water is either lost or absorbed.
a. Vegetables contain high amount of water, leafy and succulent vegetables
PY
lose water and become limp.
b. Vegetables with significant amount of starch (dried beans, root crops,
tubers) absorb water because of the hygroscopic property of starch.
3. Changes in color
Cooking for a short time, helps maintain color. The effect of heat, acid,
O
alkali, and metal on the pigment are summarized below:
unless Slightly
Carotene Little effect Little effect
excessive way Soluble
EP
darkens
Deeper red
purple or blue Very
Anthocyanin Color is stable Little effect
depending on soluble
alkalinity
D
Darken if
Very
Anthoxanthins No effect Yellow excessive in the
soluble
presence of iron
4. Changes in nutrients
a. Carbohydrate
• moist heat cooking – gelatinization of starch
• dry heat cooking – dextrinization of starch
• carmelization of sugar
b. Protein become more soluble and digestible
c. Vitamin may be destroyed in heat like vitamin C
d. Minerals are washed into the cooking liquid or oxidized
136
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
General Rules of Vegetable Cookery
• Don’t overcook.
• Prepare vegetables as close to service time as possible and in small
quantities.
• If the vegetable must be cooked ahead, undercook slightly and chill
rapidly. Reheat at service time.
• Never use baking soda with green vegetables.
• Cut vegetables uniformly for even cooking.
• Cook green vegetables and strong flavored vegetables uncovered.
PY
1. Color
Bright, natural color
2. Appearance on plate
Cut neatly and uniformly
Attractively arranged with appropriate combinations and garnishes
3. Texture
O
Cooked to the right degree of doneness
C
Crisp tender, not overcooked and mushy
Potatoes, squash, sweet potatoes, tomatoes should be cooked through
with smooth texture.
D
4. Flavor
Natural flavor and sweetness
E
5. Seasonings
Seasonings should not mask the natural flavors
6. Sauces
Do not use heavily. Vegetable should not be greasy
D
7. Vegetable combinations
Vegetables should be cooked separately for different cooking times,
and then combined.
Combine acid vegetables like tomatoes, to green vegetables just
before service to prevent discoloration of greens.
137
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cooking Frozen and Canned Vegetables
A. Frozen Vegetables
• Examine all frozen products when
received to check quality.
• Frozen vegetables require
shorter time in cooking because
they have been partially cooked.
• Cook from the frozen state; can
cook directly into a steamer or
boiling salted water.
• Corn on the cob and vegetables
that are frozen solidly, like squash, should be thawed for even cooking.
• Add less salt. Most frozen vegetables are slightly salted during
PY
processing.
B. Canned Vegetables
• Drain vegetables and place half of the liquid in a cooking pot, and bring
to boil.
O
• Add vegetables and heat to serving time. Do not boil for a long time.
• Season liquid before adding vegetables to blend flavors of herbs and
spices.
C
• Use butter to enhance the flavor of most vegetables.
E D
EP
peas, pearl onions, green beans, cauliflower, asparagus and artichokes that are
often used as garnish or accompaniment to meat dishes.
Bouquetiere bouquet of vegetables
Printaniere spring vegetables
Jardinière garden vegetables
Primeurs first spring vegetables
Clamart peas
Crecy carrots
Doria cucumbers cooked in butter
DuBarry cauliflower
138
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Fermiere carrots, turnips, onions, celery cut into uniform
slices
Florentine spinach
Forestiere mushrooms
Judic braised lettuce
Lyonnaise onions
Nicoise tomatoes concasse cooked with garlic
Parmentier potatoes
Princesse asparagus
Provençale tomatoes with garlic, parsley and sometimes
mushrooms or olives
PY
Enhancement Activity
O
C
Make a compilation of technical words commonly used in the world of culinary
D
for vegetable cookery. Follow concrete instructions below:
• Include local and foreign terminologies which are used in vegetable cookery.
• Limit your dictionary to a minimum of 10 pages and a maximum of 20 pages.
• Bind and cover it.
EP
• You can work in collaboration with others and submit after 1 week.
139
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ways of Cooking Vegetables
PY
2. Sautéing and Pan-Frying
Both methods may be used to
complete cooking or precooked or
blanched vegetables. Also used for
O
complete cooking of raw vegetables.
C 3. Braising
The blanched or raw vegetable, is
placed in the pan then liquid is added
D
(stock, water, wine) to cover vegetables,
then cooked slowly.
E
4. Baking
EP
5. Deep-frying
Vegetables large enough to coat with
breading or batter may be fried. Quick
– cooking vegetables can be fried raw.
Some, may be precooked by simmering
or steaming briefly to reduce the cooking
time in frying.
140
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
Find a partner and perform the different ways of cooking vegetables. Choose at least
2 from the given recipes.
PY
• stove • knife
• pots and pan • strainer
• chopping board • ladle
Ingredients:
O
• vegetables (any kind) • water
Procedure:
C
Boiling Vegetables
1. Trim, peel and cut vegetables as required.
2. Add required amount of water to the pot.
3. Add salt and bring to boil.
D
4. Place vegetables in the pot and return the water to a boil.
5. Reduce heat to a simmer and cook vegetable, to required doneness.
*Green vegetables and strong flavored vegetables are cooked uncovered.
E
Steaming Vegetables
1. Trim and cut vegetables as required.
2. Pre-heat the steamer.
3. Arrange vegetables in pan or baskets for cooking. Make shallow, even layers
for uniform cooking.
D
141
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Follows correctly the procedures in boiling/steaming vegetables with minor
2 errors and performs the skill satisfactorily with some assistance and/or
supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in boiling/steaming vegetables and
1
performs the skill unsatisfactorily.
ToolsEquipment Needed:
• stove • strainer
• pots and pan • spatula
• ladle
PY
Ingredients:
• vegetables (any kind) • clarified butter, oil, or fat
Procedure:
Sautéing Vegetables
O
1. Prepare vegetables as required.
2. Place sauté pan on high heat.
3. When pot is hot, add small amount of clarified butter, oil or other fat enough to
coat the bottom of the pan.
C
4. Add vegetables. Do not overload the pan, or the temperature will be lowered
too much and the vegetables will simmer instead of sauté.
5. After the heat has recovered, flip the pan to toss vegetables.
D
6. Continue to flip as necessary.
7. As soon as vegetables are cooked, remove from pan and serve.
E
Frying Vegetables
1. Prepare mise-en place. Use a griddle if only a small amount of fat is required.
EP
142
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cooking Vegetables by Braising
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• stove
• pots and pan
• strainer
• ladle
Ingredients:
• vegetables
• water or wine
Procedure:
1. Heat pan, add fat.
PY
2. Place vegetables in a pan.
(Vegetables may or may not be cooked in fat before adding liquid)
3. Add liquid, stock, water or wine or combination of liquids.
4. Cover the pan and cook vegetables.
5. Remove from heat, and serve vegetables with the cooking liquid, or drained
O
off the liquid and reduced over high heat before serving to concentrate flavor.
143
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cooking Vegetables by Baking and Deep Frying
Ingredients:
• vegetables
• breading
• oil
PY
Procedure:
Baking Vegetables
O
3. Place in appropriate pan and set in pre-heated oven.
4. Bake to desired doneness. C
Deep-Frying Vegetables
possible time.
144
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Performance Activity 2
Given the different recipes, follow the procedures by pair or by group.
Vegetable Tagliatelle
PY
Ingredients:
• 450 grams zucchini, trimmed
• 450 grams carrots, peeled and trimmed
• 450 grams celery root, peeled
• 4tbsp butter
O
Procedure:
1. Cut vegetables lengthwise into thin slices. About 1/8 inches thick, cut into long
thin strips to resemble flat noodles.
C
2. Blanch each vegetable separately into boiling salted water. Refresh under cold
water and drain.
3. Just before serving, heat butter in saucepan over moderate heat. Add
D
vegetables and toss in butter until hot.
2 tagliatelle with minor errors and performs the skill satisfactorily with
some assistance and/or supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in preparing and cooking
1
vegetable tagliatelle and performs the skill unsatisfactorily.
145
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Sautéed Mushroom
Ingredients:
• 1 1/2kg mushrooms, fresh
• 10 tbsp clarified butter or oil
• salt to taste
• pepper to taste
PY
Procedure:
1. Rinse the mushrooms quickly and dry them off with towels. Trim off the bottom
of the stems and slice the mushrooms.
2. Heat sauté pans over high heat. Add fat to the pan.
3. Place mushrooms in the pan. Do not overload. Sauté over high heat until
O
browned. Do not overcook.
4. Season with salt and pepper. C
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking
sautéed mushroom and performs the skill very satisfactorily
4
without supervision and with initiative and adaptability to
D
problem situations.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking
E
146
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Braised Celery
Ingredients:
• 1 kg celery
• 4 tbsp butter
• 1 ½ pt. brown stock or chicken stock
• salt to taste
PY
• pepper to taste
Procedure:
1. Trim and wash celery. Peel the outside part and use the tender inner stems.
Cut into 1 ½ inches lengths.
O
2. Heat the butter in a braising pot and add the celery. Cook over moderate heat
until the celery is just beginning to soften.
3. Add enough stock to cover the celery. Season with salt and pepper to taste.
C
Cover and cook slowly in an oven or range top until tender.
4. Drain the celery and keep it warm. Reduce the stock over high heat. Adjust
the seasonings and pour the sauce over the celery.
D
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking
E
problem situations.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking
3 braised celery and performs the skill satisfactorily without
assistance or supervision.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing and cooking
D
147
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Glazed Sweet Potatoes
Ingredients:
• 1.8 kg sweet potatoes
• 6 tbsp.water
• ¾ c light corn syrup or maple syrup
PY
• 6 tbsp. brown sugar
• 8 tbsp. orange juice
• 2 tbsp. lemon juice
• 2 tbsp. butter
• ½ tsp cinnamon
O
• 1/8 tsp ground cloves
• ¼ tsp salt C
Procedure:
1. Scrub sweet potatoes. Boil or steam until tender. Do not overcook.
2. Spread the potatoes on a sheet pan to cool.
3. Peel the potatoes when they are cool enough to handle. Cut into uniform
D
pieces. Arrange in a buttered baking pan.
4. Place water, syrup and sugar in a saucepan. Stir over heat until sugar is
dissolved. Add remaining ingredients and boil mixture to form heavy syrup.
E
minutes.
148
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lumpiang Ubod with Egg Wrapper
Ingredients:
• ½ kl stripped ubod • 1 head garlic
• 1 kl stripped sweet potato • 2 pcs onion
• ½ kl carrot • ½ kl ground pork
• ½ kl cabbage • 1/4kl shrimps
PY
• 2 stalk celery • 2 tsp fish sauce
• 2 cups ground peanut • 1pc pork bouillon
Procedure:
1. Blanch the ubod first
O
2. Sauté the garlic and onion, put the ground pork and 2T fish sauce
3. Put sweet potato until tender
4. Put the ubod, carrots, cabbage and celery
5. Put the ground peanut
C
6. Season to taste
Sauce:
D
Ingredients:
• ½ kl sugar • 1 stalk chopped celery
• 1/4 tsp fish sauce • ¼ cup cornstarch mixed with ¼
E
Procedure:
1. Caramelize sugar, put 1.5 liter of water and let it boil
2. Put the minced garlic, celery and peanut
3. Let it boil.
D
149
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
PY
• Divide yourselves into 5 groups
• Assign a leader.
• Leaders will assign task to each member.
• Work on your research following the assigned country
a. Group I - Asian Countries
O
b. Group II - European Countries
c. Group III - American Countries
d. Group IV - African Countries
C
e. Group V - Ethnic cooking in the Philippines.
Learning Outcome 3
Present Vegetable Dishes
D
• Presentation of prepared vegetable dishes
• Factors to consider in plating vegetable dishes
E
150
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Plating Styles with Vegetable Dishes
Classic arrangement:
PY
Main item in the center, with
vegetable distributed around it.
O
C
Main item in the center with neat
piles of vegetables carefully
D
arranged around.
E
151
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Guidelines in Plating
1. Keep food off the rim of the plate.
Select a plate large enough to hold food without hanging off the edge.
2. Arrange the items for the convenience of the customer.
Always arrange the best side of food on plate to avoid letting the diner
rearrange them before eating.
3. Keep space between items, unless, they are stacked on one another.
Arrange vegetable on plate, that every item should be identifiable.
4. Maintain unity.
Create a center of attention and relate everything to it.
5. Make every component count.
Garnishes are not added just for color, but sometimes they are needed
to balance a plate by providing an additional element.
PY
6. Add sauce or gravy attractively on plate.
Pour sauce around or under the dish or covering only a part of the dish.
Always think of the sauce as part of the overall design of the plate.
7. Keep it simple.
Avoid making food too elaborate.
O
Creative Presentation Techniques
• Vegetable Purees
1. Cook vegetable until soft, then drain well.
C
2. In food processor, process vegetable to
smooth puree.
D
3. Add melted butter or margarine.
4. Season with salt and pepper and process
again.
E
• Ribbon Vegetables
1. With vegetable peeler, shred carrot,
corvette and radish into long ribbons, about
D
• Vegetable Rings
1. With sharp knife, cut 3 peppers, (green, yellow, red) and onion into rings.
2. Remove core, seeds and membranes from peppers.
3. Toss vegetables with melted butter or margarine.
4. Cook until tender crisp.
5. Serve hot or refrigerate to serve chilled.
152
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
Photo Collection
Follow instructions below:
PY
vegetable cookery.
O
3. Label each creative presentation.
153
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
Prepare and present creatively a Stir Fried Mixed Vegetables applying your own
presentation design. Follow the procedures and ingredients given.
PY
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• pan
• mixing bowl
• ladle
• chopping board
O
• knife
• plate for serving C
Ingredients:
• 350 g Chinese cabbage, cut into chunks
• 8 dried black mushrooms, cut julienne
• 4tbsp.carrots, cut julienne
D
• 4tbsp baby corn, drained
• 4 scallions, cut into shreds
• 4tbsp oil
E
• ½ t salt
• 12tbsp water or chicken stock
• 1/8 c cornstarch
• 12tbsp water, cold
• ½ t sesame oil
D
Procedure:
1. Heat oil in a wok.
2. Add garlic.
3. Add ginger and salt.
4. Add cabbage and stir fry.
5. Add the remaining vegetables except shredded cabbage. Continue to stir
fry for 1 -2 minutes, then add shredded cabbage.
6. Add the stock, soy sauce, and cook until vegetables are crispy.
7. Mix cornstarch with cold water, then stir into vegetables to thicken the
sauce.
8. Stir in the sesame oil and serve at once.
154
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Your performance will be rated using the scoring rubric below:
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing, cooking and presenting
4 stir fried vegetables and performs the skill very satisfactorily without
supervision and with initiative and adaptability to problem situations.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing, cooking and presenting
3 stir fried vegetables and performs the skill satisfactorily without
assistance or supervision.
Follows correctly the procedures in preparing, cooking and presenting
2 stir fried vegetables with minor errors and performs the skill
satisfactorily with some assistance and/or supervision.
Was not able to follow the procedures in preparing, cooking and
1
presenting stir fried vegetables and performs the skill unsatisfactorily.
PY
Learning Outcome 4:
Store Vegetable Dishes
Fresh Vegetables
O
C
1. Potatoes and onions are stored at cool temperature. (50 -65°F) in a dry, dark
place.
2. Other vegetables must be refrigerated. To prevent drying they should be kept
covered or wrapped.
D
3. Peeled and cut vegetables should be covered or wrapped, and use quickly to
prevent spoilage.
E
4. Potatoes, eggplants and other vegetables that brown when cut should be
treated with an acid or blanched them to inactivate the enzyme that cause
browning. Raw, cut potatoes are held in cold water for a short time.
EP
Frozen Vegetables
1. Store at 0°F (-18°C). or colder in original container until ready for use.
D
Dried Vegetables
1. Store in a cool (less than 75°F) dry, well ventilated place.
2. Keep well sealed and off the floor.
Canned Vegetables
1. Keep in a cool dry place, away from sunlight and off the floor.
2. Discard cans that show signs of damage (swollen, badly dented rusted cans).
155
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Leftovers
1. Don’t mix batches.
2. Store leftover creamed vegetables for one day only. Before storing, cool rapidly
by placing the container on ice.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
156
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2 Prepare and Cook
Seafood Dishes
Overview
Seafood is any form of sea life regarded as food by humans. Seafood includes
fish and shellfish. Shellfish include various species of mollusks, crustaceans, and
echinoderms. A wide variety of fish and seafood are available in the market from many
different sources. There are so many methods for cooking seafood, most of them
are fast and easy, making them the perfect choice for a quick and healthy meal. This
lesson provides information about fish and shellfish, ways on preparing and cooking
PY
fish, along with some of the most popular seafood recipes, and presenting and storing
seafood.
O
C
You are about to learn the following from this lesson:
• Tools and equipment needed
• Types of seafood: shellfish, fin fish, others
• Variety of fish: structure, body shape, market forms, fat contents, water
D
source, processed fish, others
• Market forms of fish and fish products
• Fish cuts
E
• Composition and nutritive value of fish (scaling, cutting of tails and fins,
Eviscerating, cleansing, canning)
EP
D
157
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Classifications of Seafood
2. round fish
a. black sea bars
PY
b. bluefish
c. cod
d. grouper
B. Freshwater fish
O
1. cat fish
2. eel
3. tilapia
C
II. Shell fish – fish with external shells but no internal bone structure. They have hard
outer shells.
D
Two classifications of Shellfish
E
B. Crustaceans – are animals with segmented shells and jointed legs (shrimps,
crabs)
158
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
Parts of a Fish
O
Composition and Structure:
A fish is made up of water, protein, fats and small amount of minerals and
C
vitamins. It has very little connective tissue. This means that:
A. Fat fish -- are those that are high in fat. (salmon, tuna, trout, mackerel)
EP
B. Lean fish – are those that are low in fat. (sole, cod, red snapper, bass)
Market Forms
D
159
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Dressed -- viscera, scales, head, tail and
fins removed
PY
5. Fillets – boneless side of fish, with or
O
without skin
C
6. Butterflied fillets – both sides of a fish still
D
joined, but with bones removed
E
EP
A. Mollusks
Oysters have rough, irregular shells.
Flesh of oyster is extremely soft and delicate and contains high
percentage of water.
Hard-shell clams – can be eaten raw
Soft-shell clams are called steamers. The usual way to cook is to
steam.
160
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
The shells of mussels are not as heavy as clamshells, yellow to orange
in color and firm but tender when cooked.
Scallops are creamy white in color and have a sweet flavor.
Squid is somewhat chewy and are cut up or either fried quickly.
B. Crustaceans
The lobster shell is dark green or bluish green but turns red when
cooked.
Live lobster must be alive when cooked.
Market Forms
A. Mollusks
PY
1. live in the shell
2. shucked – fresh or frozen
3. canned
O
B. Crustaceans
1. live
2. cooked meat, fresh or frozen
C
E D
EP
D
161
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 1
Identify the market forms of fish. Write your answer in your test notebook.
PY
O
1. ___________________ 2. ___________________
C
E D
3. ___________________ 4. ___________________
EP
D
5. ___________________ 6. ___________________
7. ___________________
162
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 2:
Handle Fish and Seafood
Fin Fish
PY
O
3. Red or pink gills
C
D
4. Texture of flesh is firm or elastic
E
EP
163
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Shellfish
1. Oysters, clams, mussels in the shell must be alive and tightly closes shells
when jostled.
2. Live or shucked oysters must have a very mild, sweet smell.
3. Discard any mussels that are very light in weight or seem to be hollow.
4. Strong fishy odor or a brownish color is a sign of age or spoilage.
PY
5. Live lobsters must be alive when cooked. The meat will be firm and the tail
springs back when straightened.
6. Frozen shrimps should be solidly frozen when received.
O
7. Glazed shrimps should be shiny with no freezer burn.
8. All shrimps should smell fresh and sweet. A strong fishy or iodine smell
indicates age or spoilage.
C
E D
10. Frozen crabmeat should be treated like any other frozen fish.
D
164
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Handling and Storage of Fish
Fresh Fish
1. Store on crushed ice. Use drip pans to allow for
drainage of melted ice. Change ice daily. Cover
container or store in separate box away from
other foods.
Whole fish should be drawn because entrails
deteriorate rapidly.
Cut fish should be wrapped or left in original
moisture-proof wrap.
2. In refrigerated box at 30° to 34°F (-1° to 1°C)
PY
3. Fresh fish may be stored for 1 to 2 days. If kept
longer, wrap and freeze immediately.
4. Check store fish for freshness just before using.
Frozen Fish
O
1. Frozen products should be frozen, not thawed
when received.
2. Items should be well wrapped, with no freezer
C burn.
3. Store at 0°F (-18°C or colder)
4. Maximum storage time
• Fat fish – 2 months
D
• Lean fish – 6 months
5. Rotate stock – first in, first out.
E
EP
water.
2. Small pieces like fillets and steaks can be cooked
from frozen state to prevent excessive drip loss.
Large fish should be thawed for even cooking.
3. Fillets that are to be breaded can be partially
thawed.
4. Handle thawed fish as fresh fish. Do not refreeze.
5. Breaded, battered and other frozen prepared
fish items are mostly cooked from frozen state.
165
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Shellfish
1. Mussels
• Keep refrigerated (32°F to 35°F/0° to 2°C). and
protect from light.
• Store in original sack and keep sack damp.
2. Scallops
• Shucked scallops can be cooked without further
preparation.
PY
• Keep scallops covered and refrigerated (30°F to
34°F). Do not let them rest directly on ice or they
will lose flavor and become watery.
O
3. Lobsters
• Live lobsters are either live or cup up before
cooking. Live lobsters are plunged head first into
C
boiling water, then simmered for 5 – 6 minutes.
If served hot, they are drained well and split in
half, and claws are cracked.
• Live lobsters can be kept in two ways.
D
• packed in moist seaweed, kept in a cool place in
saltwater.
• Cooked lobster meat must be covered and
E
4. Shrimps
• Kept frozen at 0°F (-18°C) or lower.
• Thaw in refrigerator
• Peeled shrimps should be wrapped before
D
placing on ice.
• Shrimps to be served hot must be peeled and
deveined before cooking.
• Shrimps to be served cold, must be peeled after
cooking to preserve flavor.
5. Crabs
• Live crabs should be kept alive until cooked.
• Frozen crabmeat is very perishable when
thawed. It must be treated like any other frozen
fish.
166
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
PY
• Identify the kind and market forms of the fishes and other seafood
products available in the market visited.
O
and a short description.
167
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Cook Fish and Shellfish
Here, you will learn about the following:
• Principles of cooking fish and seafood dishes (dry heat and moist heat
cookery)
• Variety of shellfish and fish dishes
Fishes are very delicate and are easily overcooked. During cooking, a test for
doneness must be observed.
1. The fish just separates into flakes
PY
2. If bone is present, the flesh separates from the bone, and the bone is no longer
pink
3. The flesh becomes opaque (usually white)
O
Lean fish
Lean fish has almost no fat, so it easily becomes dry. It is best served with
C
sauces to enhance moistness and gives richness.
Poaching is the moist heat method suited
Fish should be basted with butter or oil if broiled or baked.
Lean fish maybe fried or sautéed to gain palatability from added fat.
D
Fat fish
E
The fat in fish, enables them to tolerate more heat without becoming dry.
Fat fish can be cooked by poaching.
EP
Fat fish are well suited to broiling and baking. The dry heat methods eliminate
excessive oiliness.
Large fat fish like salmon, and mackerel may be cooked in fat, but care should
be taken to avoid excessive greasiness.
D
Shellfish
Cook oyster just enough to heat thoroughly to keep it juicy and plump.
Clams become tough and rubbery if overcooked
Shrimps like other shellfish, become tough and rubbery when cooked at high
temperature.
168
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A. Scaling Whole Fish
Once your work area and fish are ready, you can begin the actual scaling process.
PY
2. Hold the fish down firmly with your
hand near its head.
O
C
D
3. Begin to rake the scales from the tail
towards the head. They should start
coming off in clumps.
E
EP
169
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Filleting Fish
PY
just clear of the fins with a slight
downward angle. When you feel the
knife is down to the bone reduce the
angle and follow the bone until you
come up against the backbone.
O
C
3. Peel the fillet back and run the knife
over the backbone severing the small
lateral fish bones in the process. Stop
D
at this point.
E
EP
170
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
6. Continue this along the length of the
fish
PY
them” with the fillet knife until the fish
backbone is reached.
171
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
12. Flip the fish back to the original side
and cut the bones around the gut
cavity.
PY
backbone.
C. Skinning Fish
O
C
When filleting or skinning fish keep the skinning knife clean and wet, this lubri-
cates the blade and gives a much cleaner cut, more control of the knife and far less
drag on the sides of the blade.
E D
172
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Wriggle the skin from side to side while
pulling backwards on the tab of fish
skin.
PY
tension it has no effect where the fillet
knife is separating the fish skin from
the flesh.
O
6. The fillet and skin are parted and no
fleshes have been wasted nor have
left any skin or scales on the fillet. If
C you scroll up you will note the knife
has not moved over the last four fish
skinning pictures.
E D
D. Deboning Fish
EP
173
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Separate the two and reinsert the
knife at an angle suitable to cut the
flesh from the underside of the gut
bones.
PY
as possible.
The fillet is now deboned and the piece on the right of the picture above is
O
discarded or washed and put aside with the fish heads and back bones for making
fish stock. C
Open oysters and clams for waste minimization techniques and environmental
considerations in relation to seafood.
A. Opening Oysters
D
Hold oyster cup side down and hinge pointed towards you.
E
174
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Twist knife handle to pop oyster open.
PY
muscle from top shell.
O
C 5. Open top shell.
E D
B. Opening Clams
175
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Over a bowl, hold the clam firmly in your
hand and insert the clam knife between
the top shell and bottom shell. A towel
can be used to protect your hand.
Work the knife around to cut through
the hinge muscle. The bowl will catch
the liquor from the clam.
PY
clam.
C. Cleaning a Squid
E
EP
D
176
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. Pull out the tail tube and cartilage. 6. Pull off the skin.
PY
7. Cut into rings.
O
D. Splitting a Lobster
How to Cut Lobster in Lengthwise
C
1. Place the lobster on its back on a tea
towel to prevent slipping.
E D
EP
177
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Using a heavy sharp knife, cut right
through the underside of the body
and tail, down the center.
PY
A lobster split is not only an attractive style for presentation, but also enables
easy access to the delicious meat inside. Turn the lobster around and continue the
cut through the center of the head.
O
C
Let’s Do It!
E D
The following will be the different activities that you need to undertake:
EP
• You can watch a video in You Tube or visit markets to see actual
demonstration for deeper learning.
178
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Guidelines for Baking Fish
1. Fat fishes are best for baking because they are less likely to dry out.
2. Lean fishes may be baked but care should be taken not to overcook it. Basting
with butter or oil helps prevent drying.
4. Served baked fish with a sauce or seasoned butter to enhance moistness and
improve palatability.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
179
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Guidelines for Broiling or Grilling Fish
1. Overcooking should be avoided in cooking fish.
3. Fat fish and lean fish should be coated with fat before broiling to reduce drying.
4. Lean fish may be dredged in flour before dipping in oil or melted butter. The
flour helps form a flavorful browned crust.
5. To prevent splitting during cooking, score the skin with a sharp knife. For small
fillets, scoring may not be necessary.
PY
6. Broil fish to order and serve immediately.
7. Broiled fish may be garnished lightly with paprika if more color is desired.
8. Thick cuts should be turned once during broiling in order to cook evenly. Thin
O
pieces may be arranged on an oiled pan and broiled on one side only. Lobsters
are also broiled without turning. C
E D
EP
D
180
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
Perform the given recipe. Your performance will be rated using the given rubric below.
PY
• broiler, griller
• brush
• baking sheet
Ingredients:
O
• 680/g large shrimp, peeled and deveined, tails left
on, patted dry
• 1 tablespoon olive oil
• 2 cloves garlic, minced
C
• coarse salt and ground pepper
• 2 tablespoons freshly squeezed lemon juice
• 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
D
• lemon wedges, for serving
Procedure:
E
1. Heat broiler with rack set 4 inches from heat. Place shrimp on a large broiler
proof rimmed baking sheet.
EP
2. Sprinkle with oil and garlic, and season generously with salt and pepper; toss
to coat. Arrange shrimp in a single layer.
3. Broil until opaque throughout, 3 to 4 minutes. Sprinkle with lemon juice and
D
181
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Guidelines for Sautéing and Pan Frying Fish and Shellfish
PY
presentation side.
8. Handle fish carefully during and after cooking
to avoid breaking the fish.
9. Sauté or fry to order and serve immediately.
O
Given the different recipes by group, prepare and cook fish and shellfish. Your
performance will be evaluated using the given rubric.
C
Fillet of Sole Meniere
D
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• mixing bowl
• ladle
E
• pan
• spatula
EP
Ingredients:
• fish
• fish rub
(or any combination of seasonings you like)
• 2 tbs. butter
D
• lemon juice
Procedure:
1. Season all the fillets by sprinkling the seasoning and pressing it into the meat.
2. Get a spatula to handle the fish. If you have 10-12” fillets cut them in half
unless you’re using a fish spatula.
3. Heat the pan on medium heat and add the butter. When the butter is melted
put some fish in the pan. Leave it on one side for about three to four minutes.
4. Move them around often to assure they’re not sticking.
5. Flip one piece to check the brownness. If it’s partially browned, flip them all
and continue to cook until the other side is browned.
6. Add more oil if needed.
7. Once it’s out of the pan put six or eight drops of lemon juice on each piece.
182
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
You may use other sauces if you want.
Note: Testing the degree of doneness is as simple as taking your spatula
and gently pushing on the thickest part of the fillet in the spinal bone line.
When done, meat separates when you gently push with spatula.
Can perform the skill without supervision and with initiative and
4
adaptability to problem situations.
Can perform the skill satisfactorily without assistance or
3
supervision.
Can perform the skill satisfactorily but requires some
2
assistance and/or supervision.
Can perform parts of the skill satisfactorily, but requires
1
considerable assistance and/or supervision.
PY
Guidelines in Deep-Frying
O
1. Lean fish, both whole or small portions, and shellfish like shrimps, clams and
oysters are best for deep-frying.
2. Fish to be fried is breaded or buttered to prevent sticking from frying pan. The
C
batter also provides a crisp, flavorful, and attractive coating.
3. Frozen breaded fish can be fried without
thawing.
4. Fried fish is usually served with lemon or
D
cold sauce such as tartar, remoulade or
cocktail sauce on the side.
5. The oil used should be enough to
E
• mixing bowls
• ladle
• refrigerator
• baking sheet
• food tong
Ingredients:
• 1 cup self-rising cornmeal • 1/4 tsp garlic salt
• 1/2 cup self-rising flour • 2 tbsp. peanut oil
• 3/4 tsp table salt • 1 large egg
• 1/2 tsp powdered white pepper • 1 tsp cool tap water
• 1/3 tsp cayenne pepper (optional)
183
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Procedure:
1. Use a small bowl and prepare an egg wash by mixing 1 large egg with 1
tsp of water.
2. In another bowl, place the cornmeal, flour, salt, pepper, cayenne pepper,
garlic salt, and blend well. This breading recipe will cover about 2 pounds
of fillets.
3. Rinse the fillets and pat dry, then place them into the refrigerator for about
30 minutes.
4. Place the fillets in the egg wash, then the breading mix before placing them
on the prepared cookie sheet.
5. Prepare the cookie sheet by spreading the peanut oil evenly on the sheet.
6. The oven should be pre-heated to 375. Cook the fillets 5 minutes on each
side.
PY
Can perform the skill without supervision and with initiative
4
and adaptability to problem situations.
Can perform the skill satisfactorily without assistance or
O
3
supervision.
Can perform the skill satisfactorily but requires some
2
assistance and/or supervision.
C
Can perform parts of the skill satisfactorily, but requires
1
considerable assistance and/or supervision.
D
You did a great job cooking. It’s now time to plate and present your dish. Go
on and enjoy learning and doing.
E
Learning Outcome 4:
Plate/Present Seafood Dishes
EP
Part of serving any kind of food is presentation. You don’t have to be a trained
chef to learn the basics of plating, which is the art of presenting food in an attractive
way. The following topics and activities will help you learn the fundamentals of plating
and perform it for better understanding.
D
Fundamentals of Plating
A. Balance – select foods and garnishes that offer variety and contrast
184
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Portion size
• match portion sizes and plates – select plates large enough to hold all the
items without crowding
• balance the portion sizes of the items on the plate – don’t let the main item
get lost with excessive garnish
• arrangement on the plate –
PY
• Make every component count.
• Add gravy or sauce attractively.
• Keep it simple.
O
Serve cold food cold, on cold plates
• Forestiere - mushrooms
• Lyonnaise - onions
EP
185
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Serving Broiled Lobster
Serve immediately with melted butter or
appropriate sauce and garnish.
PY
• Remove the fish with spatula and place
on serving plate with presentation side
up.
• Sprinkle fish with lemon juice and
chopped parsley.
O
• Heat raw butter in the sauté pan until
it turns light brown. Pour over fish
immediately and serve at once.
C
Serving Poached or Simmered Fish in Court
bouillon
D
Served poached fish with appropriate
sauce, such as hollandaise for hot fish and
a mayonnaise – based sauce for cold fish.
E
186
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Glazing
Poached fish is sometimes glazed before serving
1. Combine the finished sauce with egg
yolk, Hollandaise sauce or lightly
whipped cream.
2. Coat the fish with the sauce and run the
plate under a broiler until the sauce is
golden brown.
PY
Review of Learning Outcome 1
O
C
A. Briefly explain the relationships of the following in food preparation. Write your
answers in your test notebook.
D
1. Balance
E
2. Portion size
EP
5. Garnishes
187
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
PY
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• oven
• baking sheet
• brush
• fork
• plate
Ingredients:
• 3 fish steaks, 1” thick
O
• ½ tsp. salt
C
• dash of pepper
• 2 tsp. lemon juice
D
• 2 tbsp. butter, melted
Procedure:
E
1. Sprinkle both sides of fish with salt, pepper and lemon juice.
2. Brush with half of the butter.
3. Put fish in broiler pan in 550 °F oven, don’t cover.
EP
4. Broil with tops about 4 inches from heat until light brown.
5. Brush fish with butter turn very carefully.
6. Brush with rest of the butter.
7. Broil until fish flakes easily with fork, 4 – 6 more minutes.
D
188
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Poached Fillet of Sole in White Wine Sauce
PY
• 3 tbsp. butter
• 4 tbsp. flour
• 1 C grated cheese
• Salt and pepper
Procedure:
O
1. Roll and secure each fillet with toothpicks
2. Poach for 8 minutes in wine/fish stock
3. Drain and save liquid
C
Sauce
1. Melt butter
2. Blend in flour, salt and pepper and fish liquid
D
3. Assemble butter in shallow serving dish
4. Arrange spinach on bottom
5. Cover with poached fish (remove toothpicks
E
Can perform the skill without supervision and with initiative and
4
adaptability to problem situations.
3 Can perform the skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision.
D
Can perform the skill satisfactorily but requires some assistance and/
2
or supervision.
Can perform parts of the skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
1
assistance and/or supervision.
189
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 5:
Store Seafood
Storing of Fish and Shellfish
1. On crushed ice – use drip pans to allow for
drainage of melted ice. Change ice daily. Cover
container or store in separate box away from
Fresh Fish other foods.
a. Whole fish should be drawn (that is viscera
removed) as soon as possible because the
entrails deteriorate quickly.
b. Cut fish (fillets, steaks, portions) should be
wrapped or left in original moisture proof wrap.
2. Refrigerate at 30° to 34°F (-1° to 1°C)
PY
3. Fish may be stored for 1 to 2 days. If it must
be kept longer, you must wrap and freeze it
immediately.
4. Check stored fish for freshness just before you
use it. Even if it was fresh when received, it may
O
not be fresh after few days in storage.
Frozen Fish
1. Store at 0°F (-18°C) or colder
C
2. Keep well wrapped to prevent freezer burn
3. Maximum storage time: Fat fish – 2 months;
Lean fish – 6 months;
D
4. Rotate stock – first in, first out.
E
Shellfish- Oyster
1. Keep live oysters in a cold, wet place in the
EP
cartons or sacks.
2. Store fresh shucked oysters in original container
in refrigerator at 30° to 34°F (-1° to 1°C). They
will keep up to 1 week.
3. Keep frozen oysters in freezer at 0°F (-18°C. or
colder, until ready for use.
D
190
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 5
Match Column A with Column B. Write the letter of the correct letter of your answer in
your test notebook. Items in column B may be answered twice or more.
Column A Column B
1. Removed viscera first before storing A. fresh fish
2. Wrapped to prevent freezer burns B. frozen fish
PY
3. Kept in cold, wet cartons C. lobster and shrimp
4. Packed in moist seaweed D. shellfish
5. First in, first out E. all of the above
6. Wrapped before freezing
7. Left in original moisture proof wrapped
O
8. Refrigerate at 30° to 34°F (-1° to 1°C)
9. Store at 0°F ( -18°C or colder)
10. Stored for 1 to 2 days
C
D
Let’s Do It!
E
EP
Perform experimental fish cookery. Make your own recipe and prepare, cook and
present the product. Explain how to properly store your output. Your performance will
be evaluated using the given rubric.
Can perform the skill without supervision and with initiative and
D
4
adaptability to problem situations.
3 Can perform the skill satisfactorily without assistance or supervision.
Can perform the skill satisfactorily but requires some assistance and/or
2
supervision.
Can perform parts of the skill satisfactorily, but requires considerable
1
assistance and/or supervision.
191
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s See How Much You Learned
Posttest 2
A. Multiple Choice
Read the following questions carefully and choose the letter that best describes the
statement. Write your answer in your test notebook.
PY
1. Which of the following vegetables is rich in carbohydrates?
A. legumes, peas, and beans C. mushroom, tomatoes, and radish
B. nuts, olives, and avocado D. seeds, roots, and tubers
2. What is the flavor component of vegetables which gives strong flavor and
odor to some vegetables like onions, leeks, garlic, chives, cabbage, and
broccoli?
O
A. flavonoids C. sugar
B. glutamic acid D. sulfur compounds
3. Which tool is used to drain excess water after washing vegetables?
A. bowls C. steamer
C
B. colander D. utility tray
4. Which of the following is cooked by placing blanched or raw vegetables
D
in the pan, adding liquid (stock, water, wine) then covering and cooking it
slowly?
A. boiling C. braising
E
B. baking D. sautéing
5. Which fat soluble compound is responsible for the green coloring of plants?
A. anthocyanins C. chlorophyll
EP
B. carotenoids D. lycopene
6. Mrs. Cabrillas needs more supply of Vitamin A. which of the following will
she eat to give her the nutrient she needs?
A. alugbati C. lettuce
B. potatoes D. saluyot
D
192
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
9. What kind of knife is used in removing the hard core of a cabbage?
A. butcher knife C. cutting knife
B. channel knife D. paring knife
10. At what temperature in a dry, dark place should potatoes and onions be
stored?
A. 50 – 650F C. 60 – 850F
B. 40 – 45 F
0
D. 70 – 950F
11. Which of the following vegetables is cooked uncovered?
A. fruit vegetables C. roots and tubers
B. green vegetables D. yellow vegetables
12. What kind of fish has no internal bone structure?
A. fin fish C. round fish
B. freshwater fish D. shell fish
PY
13. Which of the following fishes is high in fat?
A. bass C. mackerel
B. cod D. red snapper
14. Which of the following fishes is low in fat?
A. cod C. trout
O
B. salmon D. tuna
15. What market form is produced when the viscera, head, tail and fins are
removed?
A. butterfly
B. dressed D. sticks
C C. fillet
A. butterfly C. fillet
B. drawn D. steak
18. Which of the following is the second step in scaling whole fish?
EP
A. Begin to rake the scales from the tail towards the head.
B. Remove the scales on both sides of the fish.
C. Hold the fish down firmly with your hand near its head.
D. Lay your fish flat on the board.
19. Which of the following is the third step in opening an oyster?
D
193
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
22. Which of the following seafoods are cooked with just enough to heat to
keep it juicy and plump?
A. fat fish C. flat fish
B. lean fish D. shellfish
23. Which of the following enhances baked fish when served?
A. butter C. lemon
B. cream D. sauce
24. What cooking method is suited to fat fish?
A. baking C. deep -frying
B. boiling D. sautéing
25. Which is basted to baked lean fish to help prevent it from drying up?
A. butter C. soy sauce
B. cream D. tomato sauce
PY
B. Give five characteristics of a fresh fish.
26. ____________________________________________________
27. ____________________________________________________
O
28. ____________________________________________________
29. ____________________________________________________
30. ____________________________________________________
C
E D
EP
D
194
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Quarter 3
Prepare Stocks, Sauces and Soups
Poultry and Game Dishes
Overview
This quarter will enable students or learners to acquire competencies in:
preparing, storing, reconstituting and evaluating stocks, sauces and soups; cooking,
plating/presenting, and storing poultry and game dishes, preparing, cooking, plating,
presenting and storing meat dishes.
Objectives:
PY
At the end of the quarter students are expected to:
1. prepare stocks required for menu item;
2. prepare soups required for menu item;
3. prepare sauces required for menu item;
O
4. store and reconstitute stocks, sauces and soups;
5. perform mise’en place;
6. cook poultry and meat dishes;
7.
C
plate and present poultry and meat dishes;
8. evaluate finished products; and
9. store poultry and meat.
D
Let’s See What You Know
E
Pretest 3
EP
Read and understand the questions below. Choose the letter of the correct answer
and write it in your test notebook.
1. As a chef of a fine dining restaurant, Genie simmers meat, fish, and
vegetables. Which of the following liquids is a by-product after the different
D
195
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. Among the different types of stock, which one is the easiest to prepare?
A. brown stock C. white stock
B. fish stock D. vegetable stock
6. What stock is made by boiling prawn shell?
A. fish stock C. prawn stock
B. ham stock D. vegetable stock
7. As a rule, which should not be added to the stock because it causes
saltiness?
A. MSG C. spices
B. salt D. sugar
8. Mrs. Sante will be having visitors for dinner. If she will prepare stock for
their dinner, which of the following flavoring agents will she use to give
aroma to the stock?
PY
A. aromatic flavoring C. ginger
B. garlic D. smoke
9. What makes the stock tasty and appetizing?
A. appearance C. ingredients
B. color D. smell
O
10. Which of the following is a clear soup?
A. bisques C. cream
B. bouillon D. puree
A. bisques C. consommé
C
11. Which of the following examples is a thick soup?
B. bouillon D. fruit
12. Which of the following is not a thickening agent?
D
A. flour C. rice
B. grain D. salt
13. Which of the four basic sauces whose basic ingredient is milk is thickened
E
14. Which among the four basic sauces has a chief ingredient of chicken broth
thickened with flour and enriched with butter seasoning?
A. Hollandaise sauce C. veloute sauce
B. savory butter D. white sauce
15. Which of the four basic sauces has three basic ingredients like butter, egg
D
196
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
18. What do you call birds that are hunted for food?
A. game C. poultry
B. livestock D. swine
19. Which of the following poultry originated from China and is noted for its
tender and flavorful meat?
A. chicken C. itik
B. goose D. peking duck
20. A young immature pigeon of either sex with extra tender meat is called___.
A. duck C. rooster
B. fryer D. squab
21. Poultry is composed of different parts. To which of the following does breast
meat belong?
A. dark meat C. variety meat
PY
B. tough meat D. white meat
22. Which of the following characteristics is a good quality of live poultry?
A. free from pin feathers and shows no cuts
B. has clear eye
C. heavy and the skin is watery
O
D. well-develop thighs
23. What do you call young chickens that are usually 9 to 12 weeks of age?
A. fryer C. roaster
B. hen D. stag
C
24. How many days should a whole chicken should be refrigerated?
A. 1 day C. 2 to 4 days
B. 1 to 2 days D. 3 to 4 days
D
25. How do you classify the chicken breast?
A. entrails C. viscera
B. dark meat D. white meat
E
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
27. What cooking method is suitable for the less tender cuts?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
D
197
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1 Prepare Stocks, Sauces And
Soups
Overview:
This lesson covers the skills, knowledge, and attitudes required to prepare
various stocks, sauces, and soups in a commercial kitchen or catering operation.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this Lesson you are expected to do the following:
PY
1. prepare stocks for required menu items;
2. prepare soups required for menu items;
3. prepare sauces required for menu items;
O
4. store and reconstitute stocks, sauces and soups; and
5. evaluate the finished product C
Learning Outcome 1:
Prepare Stocks for Required Menu Items
D
Stocks are:
• among the most basic preparations found in professional kitchens.
EP
198
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Classification of Stocks
PY
White stock – made from beef or veal
bones.
O
C
D
199
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ingredients in Preparing Stocks
1. Bones
Most of the flavor and
body of stocks are derived from
the bones of beef, veal, chicken,
fish, and pork. The kinds of
bones used determine the kind
of stock, except vegetable stock.
2. Mirepoix
PY
- is the French term
for the combination of coarsely
chopped onions, carrots and
celery used to flavor stocks.
Basic formula for Mirepoix –
O
used to flavor white stocks and
soups, tomato paste or puree is
often included for brown stock,
gravy, stew or soup.
C
• 2 parts onion
• 1 part celery
• part carrot
D
4. Scraps and left-over -Scraps may be used in stocks if they are clear,
EP
200
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Guidelines for preparing stock
1. Follow the correct procedures for cooling and storing stock and make
sure that any stock you use is flavorful and wholesome.
PY
ingredients and the size of vegetables cut
3. The stock ingredients are boiled starting with cold water. This promotes the
extraction of protein which may be sealed in by hot water.
4. Stocks are simmered gently, with small bubbles at the bottom but not
breaking at the surface. If a stock is boiled, it will be cloudy.
O
5. Salt is not usually added to a stock, as this causes it to become too salty,
since most stocks are preserved to make soup and sauces.
6. Meat is added to the stock before the vegetables and the “scum” that rises
C
to the surface is skimmed off before further ingredients are added.
D
Different Kinds of Spices and Seasoning
E
EP
D
201
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
202
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
PY
Tools and Equipment:
• stove
• stock pot
• chopping board
O
• knife
• skimmer/strainer
• ladle
• container
C
Ingredients:
• 4 -5 kg bones; chicken, veal or beef
D
• 1 L water, cold
Mirepoix
• 450 g onion, chopped
E
Bouquet Garni
• 1 pc dried bay leaf
• ¼ tsp dried thyme
• ¼ tsp peppercorns
• 6-8 stems parsley
• 2 whole cloves
D
Procedure:
1. Cut the bones into pieces, 3 to 4 inches long for easy extraction.
2. Rinse in cold water to remove impurities that cloud the stock.
3. Place the bones in the stockpot and cover with cold water to speed
extraction.
4. Bring water to a boil and then, reduce to simmer. Skim the scum that
comes from the surface for a clear stock. Do not let the stock boil because
it makes the stock cloudy.
5. Keep the water level above the bones because bones cooked while
exposed to air will turn dark and darken the stock. Also, bones will not
203
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
release flavor into the water.
6. Add the mirepoix.
7. Simmer for recommended length of time.
8. Strain through several layers of cheesecloth.
9. Cool the stock as quickly as possible by:
• setting the pot in a sink and allow cold water to flow under the pot
and around it
• stirring the pot occasionally so all the stock cools evenly
10. When cooled, refrigerate the stock properly in covered containers for 2-3
days. If properly frozen, it will last for several months.
OVERALL EVALUATION
Level
PY
Ask your teacher to assess Achieved PERFORMANCE LEVELS
your performance in the
4 - Can perform the skill very satisfactorily
following critical tasks and
without supervision and with initiative and
performance criteria below
adaptability to problem situations.
O
You will be rated based on 3 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily
the evaluation on the right without assistance or supervision.
side. 2 - Can perform the skill less satisfactorily
C but requires some assistance and/or
supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of the skill
satisfactorily, and requires considerable
D
assistance and/or supervision.
Teacher will initial level achieved.
E
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
For acceptable achievement, all items should receive 1 2 3 4
EP
an answer.
1. Cut the bones into pieces, 3 to 4 inches long.
2. Rinse in cold water to remove impurities that cloud the
stock.
3. Place the bones in the stockpot and cover with cold
D
204
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Basic Brown Stock
Tools and Equipment:
• stove
• stock pot
• chopping board
• knife
• skimmer/strainer
• ladle
• container
Ingredients:
• 4 ½ kg. bones; chicken, veal or beef
• 10-12 qtr.water, cold
PY
Mirepoix
• 450 g onion, chopped
• 16 tbsp. carrot, chopped
• 16 tbsp. celery, chopped
• 450 g tomato puree
O
Bouquet Garni
• 1 pc dried bay leaf
• ¼ tsp dried thyme
C
• ¼ tsp peppercorns
• 6-8 stems parsley
• 2 whole cloves
D
Procedure:
1. Cut the bones into pieces, 3-4 inches long. Use veal or beef bones.
E
2. Do not wash or blanch the bones. The moisture would hinder browning.
3. Place the bones in a roasting pan in one layer, and brown in a hot oven
EP
at 375°F (190°C) or higher. The bones must be well browned to color the
stock sufficiently. Bones may be oiled lightly before browning.
4. When the bones are well browned, remove from pan and place in a
stockpot. Cover with cold water and bring to simmer.
5. Drain and reserve the fat from the roasting pan. Deglaze the pan by adding
D
water and stirring over heat until all the brown drippings are dissolved or
loosened. Add to stockpot.
6. While the stock is getting started, place the mirepoix in the roasting pan
with some of the reserved fat and brown the vegetable well in the oven.
7. When the water in the stockpot comes to a simmer, skim the scum at the
surface.
8. Add the browned vegetable and tomato puree to the stockpot.
9. Put the bouquet garni by tying it to the handle of the pot for easy removal.
10. Continue to simmer for recommended length of time, 6-8 hours.
11. Strain through several layers of cheesecloth.
12. Cool the stock and refrigerate properly in a covered container to keep for
2-3 days. If properly frozen, it will last for several months.
205
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
How Well Did You Perform?
Find out by accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly. Remember it is your learning
at stake!
OVERALL EVALUATION
Level
Achieved PERFORMANCE LEVELS
Ask your teacher to assess
your performance in the
4 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily
following critical task and
without supervision and with initiative
performance criteria below
and adaptability to problem situations.
You will be rated based on the 3 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily
PY
evaluation on the right side. without assistance or supervision.
2 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily
but requires some assistance and/or
supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of the skill
O
satisfactorily, but requires considerable
C assistance and/or supervision.
6. Add mirepoix
7. Simmer for recommended length of time
8. Strain through several layers of cheesecloth
9. Cool the stock as quickly as possible
10.When cool, refrigerate the stock properly in covered
containers to keep for 2-3 days.
206
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 1
Read the following questions carefully and choose the letter of the correct answer.
Write your answer in your test notebook.
1. What do you call the liquid in which meat, fish, and sometimes vegetables have
been cooked?
A. glaze C. stock
PY
B. sauce D. water
2. Which of the following stocks uses veal bone as its main ingredient?
A. brown stock C. prawn stock
B. ham stock D. white stock
3. What kind of stock uses fish as its main ingredient?
O
A. brown stock C. glace viands
B. fish stock D. ham stock
4. What stock uses chicken bone as its main ingredient?
A. fish stock
C
B. ham stock
C. prawn stocks
D. chicken stocks
D
5. Which one is the easiest to prepare?
A. brown stock C. white stock
B. fish stock D. vegetable stock
E
EP
Learning Outcome 2:
Prepare Soups Required for Menu Items
Soups
D
Soups are based on stocks added with other ingredients for variety of flavor,
consistency, appearance and aroma.
207
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Classifications of Soups
A. Clear Soups
PY
combining lean chopped meat, egg whites, mirepoix,
herbs and spices and an acidic ingredient like tomatoes, wine, or lemon juice. The
combination is called “clarification” since the particles that make the broth appear
cloudy are trapped as it cooks. A good quality consommé is crystal – clear, has a
good body, amber to brown in color, and completely fat-free.
O
1. Broth and bouillon simple clear soup without solid ingredients.
Broth and bouillon are similar to stock in technique and in cooking time.
C
The major distinction between broth and stock is that broths can be served as is,
whereas stocks are used in production of other dishes.
2. Vegetable soup – clear seasoned stock or broth with the addition of one or
D
more vegetable, meat, or poultry.
3. Consommé’ – rich, flavorful stock or broth that has been clarified to make it
E
B. Thick Soups
A kind of cream soup based on crustaceans like shrimps and lobsters is bisque.
It is made by simmering a crustacean in a stock or a fish fumet.
208
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Another thick vegetable soup is the chowder made with broth, milk or water
as base, then thickened with roux. Cold, thick soups such as vichyssoise are simply
cream soups served cold. Others like gazpacho or a chilled cantaloupe soup are
based on a puree of cooked or raw ingredients brought to the correct consistency by
adding fruits or vegetable juice as a liquid.
PY
4. Chowders – are hearty soups made from fish, shellfish or vegetables
usually contain milk and potatoes.
O
C. Other types of soup
1. Dessert soup
a. Ginataan – a Filipino soup made from coconut milk, milk, fruit, and
C
tapioca pearl served hot or cold.
b. Osheriku – a Japanese asuki bean soup.
c. Tonge sui – a Chinese soup.
D
2. Fruit soup can be served hot or cold depending on the recipe where
dried fruits are used like raisins and prunes. Fruit soup may include milk,
sweet or savory dumplings, spices or alcoholic beverages like brandy and
E
champagne.
EP
209
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ingredients of soup
• meat (chicken, beef, pork, lamb, • eggs
fish) • cornstarch
• salt • seasoning (msg, convenience
• pepper products)
• vegetables (carrots, string beans, • butter
turnips, tomatoes, mushrooms, • cream
celery, leak) • garnishes (slices of lemon, egg,
• onion shredded vegetables, pimiento
• garlic strips)
• water
PY
Basic Principles of Preparing Soup
1stPrinciple. Start with Cold Water
Why cold water? Most protein, vitamins and minerals dissolve in cold
water. Part of the flavor comes from these components. Using hot water would
lessen the flavor and nutritive content of stock
O
2ndPrinciple. Cut vegetables to appropriate size for the type of stock
The size of cut helps the maximum flavor to be extracted.
C
Example 1: A fish stock only simmer for a half hour (30 minutes) so the cut
should be julienne (thin strips: ¼ inch thick 2-3 inches long)
D
Example 2: A brown stock simmers for 4-6 hours and sometimes 24 hours, so
the cut should be 1” cubed so that stock will have time to extract the flavor and
will not fall apart after a long cooking.
E
3rd Principle. Select your protein base: beef, chicken, pork and fish
All bones are washed, roasted or blanched; roasted for brown sauce
EP
210
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cooking soups
Meats, Poultry and Fish
• Cuts of meat that are less tender should be added early in the cooking
process.
• Poultry needs to be added early enough so that it cooks thoroughly.
• Add fish closed to the end of the cooking process to keep it from overcooking.
PY
Dense or Starchy Vegetables
• A small-diced cut of potatoes, carrots, and winter squashes will require 30–45
minutes to cook.
O
Green Vegetables:
• These vegetables should be added during the final 15–20 minutes of cooking
the soup.
C
Adjusting Consistency
Thick soups may continue to thicken during cooking and may need additional
stock or water added to adjust the consistency.
D
Degreasing
E
211
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
PY
• casserole
• gas or electric stove
• knife
• chopping board
• strainer
O
• saucepot
• measuring cup
• measuring spoon
• wooden spoon
C
• soup ladle
Ingredients:
D
• ½ cup chopped bacon
• ¾ kg potatoes
E
• 3 cups water
• 2 bulbs onions, chopped
• 1 whole chicken bouillon cube
EP
• 1½ c all-purpose cream
Procedure:
1. Cook bacon until crispy. Cool and set aside, peel potatoes and cut into
cubes;place in a saucepot and add water and chopped onions. Bring to a boil
and cook until potatoes are tender. Remove potatoes and sear the broth.
2. Add chicken bouillon cube to the reserved potato broth to make potato chicken
broth and stir until dissolved. Add the hot water. Place cooked potatoes in
blender in 2 batches, adding ¾ cup of the potato-chicken broth with each batch.
Cover and blend for 1 minute or until smooth. Set aside.
212
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Melt butter in a saucepan. Add flour, salt and pepper. Add all-purpose cream
at once. Stir while cooking until slightly thickened and bubbly. Cook for 1
minute more. Stir until heated through. If necessary, stir in additional milk to
make the desired consistency. Serve with sprinkled bacon bits.
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly
Remember it is your learning at stake!
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
PY
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
O
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
C
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
D
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
E
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
EP
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
D
213
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
CONSOMME A LA MADRILENE
Tools and Equipment
• casserole
• gas or electric stove
• knife
PY
• chopping board
• measuring cup
• measuring spoon
• wooden spoon
• soup ladle
Ingredients
• 1kg. lean beef, cut in 3 portions
O • 2 spring parsley
• ½ kg bone marrow
C • pinch basil
• 3 ½ liter cold water • 1 clove garlic
• 3 large carrots, cut up • 1pc bay leaf
• 2 cloves onion, stuck with 3 cloves • 3 large egg whites, beaten
D
• 2 stalks celergy with leaves • 3 crushed eggshells
• 3 leeks, sliced lengthwise and • 2 cup tomato puree
E
PROCEDURE:
1. Combine the beef, bone and water in a stockpot and bring to a boil. Simmer
for 5 minutes and skim. Cover and simmer for 1 hour.
2. Add to the onion stock with cloves, the carrots, celery, leeks, salt peppercorns,
parsley, thyme, garlic and bay leaf. Cover and cook slowly for 4 – 5 hours.
D
3. Strain through a double thickness of cheesecloth and skim off fat. Use
absorbent paper towels.Remove the remaining particles and reserve the meat
for another purpose.
4. To clarify the consommé, return it to the heat and add beaten egg whites and
eggshells.
5. Bring to a rolling boil and strain once more through 3 thickness cheesecloth.
6. Pour 6 cups of consommé into a saucepan and reserve the remainder for
another use.
7. Add the tomato puree, onion, and dried basil. Simmer for 20 minutes, remove
from the heat and strain through cheesecloth.
8. Serve hot.
214
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Find out how well you performed by accomplishing the Scoring Rubric honestly.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
PY
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
O
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
D
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
E
215
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
EGG DROP SOUP
Tools and Equipment
• casserole • strainer
• stockpot with cover • measuring cup
• gas or electric stove • measuring spoon
• knife • wooden spoon
• chopping board • soup ladle
• mortar and pestle
Ingredients
• 6 ½ cups prepared basic chicken stock light
• 2 tbsp soy sauce
• 2 tbsp sherry
PY
• ¼ tsp white pepper
• 2 large egg whites
• 1 tbsp salt
• 2 tbsp sesame oil
• 1/8 tsp cornstarch
O
• 2 large eggs
• 1 tbsp scallions, thinly sliced C
Procedure:
1. In a 2-quart soup pot, pour 6 cups of chicken broth to a simmer. Add the soy
sauce, sherry, pepper, and salt.
2. Beat the egg whites lightly. Drizzle into the chicken broth mixture.
D
3. Mix the cornstarch with the remaining ½ cup chicken stock until lump free. Add
to the soup. Stir in the sesame oil, garnish with scallions and serve hot.
E
Evaluate your finished product and performance, using the given score sheet.
EP
216
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
and pot holders.
b. Learner observes proper sanitary handling of food.
3. Conservation of nutrients
PY
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
O
Comments:
• measuring cup
• measuring spoon
EP
• wooden spoon
• soup ladle
Ingredients
• 22 grams butter • 1 pc small chicken cube
• 1 medium onion, chopped • ½ cup cream
D
Procedure:
1. Melt butter in a large saucepan, add onion and bacon, stir constantly over heat
until onion is soft.
2. Add carrots to pan, then chicken stock and cube, bring to a boil, reduce heat,
cover, simmer for about 30 minutes or until carrots are tender. Remove
saucepan from heat.
3. Blend or process mixture in several batches until smooth.
4. Return mixture to pan, stir in cream, reheat, and stir constantly without boiling.
5. Season with salt and pepper. Serve hot
217
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
PY
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
O
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients. C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
D
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
E
Comments:
218
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ingredients
• 200 grams butter • ½ cup chopped onion
• 1 tsp. salt • ½ cup cubed celery
• 1 pc carrot, strips • ½ cup cubed carrot
• 1 pc onion, sliced • 7 cup chicken stock
• 6 cups water • ½ cup all-purpose flour
• 6 strips bacon strips • 1 can small corn kernels
Procedure:
1. In a saucepan, put chicken breast, salt, carrot, onion, and water. Bring to a
boil. Cook for 20 minutes.
2. Strain out chicken stock. Set aside. Remove chicken breast. Slice meat into
cubes. Set aside.
PY
3. In a saucepan, put bacon strips. Cook until brown. Set aside.
4. Retain about 2 tablespoons of the bacon drippings.
5. In a saucepan, using the bacon drippings, sauté onions until soft. Add
chicken meat. Mix well. Add flour. Stir well.
6. Add the chicken mixture. Let it simmer. Stir until thick.
O
7. Put soup in a bowl, top with chopped bacon. Serve while hot.
It may be served with barley-garlic, bread, and bacon at the side.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
C Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
D
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
E
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
D
219
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
and pot holders.
b. Learner observes proper sanitary handling of food.
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
Comments:
PY
Review of Learning Outcome 2
O
Read the question carefully and choose the letter of the correct answer. Write your
answer in your test booklet.
1. Which of the following is a clear soup?
A. bisque
B. bouillon
C. cream
D. puree
C
2. What substance is added to give taste to the food?
A. decoration C. seasoning
D
B. flavoring D. thickening
3. What type of soup can be served either hot or cold?
A. ancient soup C. dessert soup
E
B. basin D. tray
5. What makes a soup appetizing?
A. garnish C. taste
B. ingredients D. all of the above
D
Enhancement Activity
Photo Gallery
• Creatively make a photo album of different soups served here and abroad.
• It should contain a minimum of 10 pages and a maximum of 15 pages.
• Label each creative presentation.
220
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Prepare Sauces Required for Menu Item
Sauces
One of the important components of a dish is the sauce. Sauces serve a
particular function in the composition of a dish. These enhance the taste of the food
to be served as well as add moisture or succulence to food that are cooked dry.
Sauces also enhance the appearance of a dish by adding luster and sheen. A sauce
that includes a flavor complementary to a food brings out the flavor of that food. It
defines and enriches the overall taste and its texture. Sauce is a fluid dressing for
poultry, meat, fish, dessert and other culinary products.
Sauce is a flavorful liquid, usually thickened that is used to season, flavor and
PY
enhance other foods. It adds:
1. moistness 4. appearance (color and shine)
2. flavor 5. appeal
3. richness
O
Basic Sauces for Meat, Vegetables, and Fish
1. White sauce - Its basic ingredient is milk which is thickened with flour
enriched with butter.
C
2. Veloute sauce- Its chief ingredients are veal, chicken and fish broth,
thickened with blonde roux.
3. Hollandaise – It is a rich emulsified sauce made from butter, egg yolks,
D
lemon juice and cayenne.
4. Emulsion – (as fat in milk) consists of liquid dispersed with or without an
emulsifier in another liquid that usually would not mix together.
E
A. Variation of Sauces
1. hot sauces – made just before they are to be used.
D
2. cold sauces – cooked ahead of time, then cooled, covered, and placed in
the refrigerator to chill.
B. Thickening Agents
A thickening agent thickens sauce to the right consistency. The sauce
must be thick enough to cling lightly to the food.
Starches are the most commonly used thickeners for sauce making.
Flour is the principal starch used. Other products include cornstarch, arrowroot,
waxy maize, pre-gelatinized starch, bread crumbs, and other vegetables and
grain products like potato starch and rice flour.
221
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Starches thicken by gelatinization, which is the process by which starch
granules absorb water and swell many times their original sizes.
PY
a. Clarified butter. Using clarified butter
results to finest sauces because of its
flavor.
O
C
b. Margarine. Used as a substitute for
butter because of its lower cost.
D
and lard.
EP
2. Flour
The thickening power of flour depends
on its starch content. Bread flour is
commonly used in commercial cooking.
It is sometimes browned for use in
brown roux. Heavily browned flour has
only 1/3 the thickening power of not
brown flour.
222
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
A roux must be cooked so that the sauce does not have a raw, starchy
flour taste. The kinds of roux differ on how much they are cooked.
• White roux – cooked just enough to cook the raw taste of flour;
used for béchamel and other white sauces based on milk.
PY
C. Common Problems in Sauce
1. discarding
2. oiling-off
3. poor texture
O
4. synersis (weeping)
5. oil streaking C
Methods Of Preparing Sauces
Sauces Blanches
D
(White Sauce)
E
Liquid:
Purpose Butter Flour
Milk / Stock / Cream
EP
223
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Making Roux
Procedure:
1. Melt fat.
PY
2. Add correct amount of flour, and
stir until fat and flour is thoroughly
mixed.
O
C
3. Cook to the desired degree of
white, blond or brown roux.
E D
1. Reduction
• Using reduction to concentrate basic
flavors
The water evaporates when simmered. The
sauce becomes more concentrated and more
D
flavorful.
• Using reduction to adjust textures
The sauce may be simmered until it reaches
the desired thickness. Stock or other liquid may be
added to thickened sauce to thin it out, then simmer
to reduce to the right consistency.
• Using reduction to add new flavors.
Glazes or reduced stocks are added to sauces
to give flavor.
224
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Straining
This is very important in order to
produce a smooth, lump free sauce. Straining
through a china cap lined with several layers of
cheesecloth is effective
3. Deglazing
To deglaze means to swirl a liquid in a
sauté pan to cooked particles of food remaining
on the bottom.
PY
Liquid such as wine or stock is used
to deglaze then reduced by one-half or three-
fourths. This reduction, with the added flavor of
the pan drippings, is then added to the sauce.
O
4. Enriching with butter and cream
Liaison mixture of egg yolks and cream
added to sauce to give extra richness and
C smoothness.
• lemon juice
• cayenne
• white pepper
• sherry and Madeira
225
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
PAN GRAVY
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• roasting pan • strainer
PY
• saucepan • ladle
Procedure:
Method 1
1. Remove the roast from the roasting pan.
O
2. Clarify the fat.
3. Deglaze the pan.
4. Combine with stock and simmer.
C
5. Make a roux or a slurry of arrowroot or cornstarch and water.
6. Thicken the gravy with the roux or cornstarch slurry.
7. Strain.
8. Adjust seasoning.
D
Method 2
1. Remove the roast from the roasting pan.
E
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
PY
and pot holders.
b. Learner observes proper sanitary handling of food.
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
O
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
Comments:
C
D
BÉCHAMEL SAUCE
Tools and Equipment Needed:
E
• saucepan
• ladle
• cheesecloth
EP
• spoon
Ingredients:
• 4 tbsp clarified butter • ¼ pc onions
• 4 tbsp bread flour • salt to taste
• ¼ gal milk • nutmeg to taste
D
227
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
PY
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
O
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
D
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
E
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
D
Comments:
228
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
HOLLANDAISE SAUCE
Ingredients:
• 1 kg butter • 6 tbsp lemon juice
PY
• 12 pcs egg yolks • Salt to taste
• 4 tbsp cold water • Cayenne to taste
Procedure:
1. Clarify the butter. Keep the butter warm but not hot.
2. Place the egg yolks and cold water in a stainless steel bowl and beat well.
O
Beat in a few drops of lemon juice.
3. Hold the bowl over a hot water bath and continue to beat until the yolks are
thickened and creamy.
C
4. Remove the bowl from the heat. Using a ladle, slowly and gradually beat in the
warm butter. Add the butter drop by drop at first. If the sauce becomes too
thick to beat before all the butter is added, beat in a little of the lemon juice.
D
5. When all the butter has been added, beat in lemon juice to taste and adjust
seasoning with salt and cayenne. Keep warm for service. Hold no longer than
1 ½ hours.
E
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
EP
229
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
and pot holders.
PY
b. Learner observes proper sanitary handling of food.
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
O
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
Comments:
C
D
Review of Learning Outcome 3
E
Choose the correct answer from the given choices. Write the letter of your answer in
EP
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Enhancement Activity
Research Hour
Make a research on at least ten sauces and the food where it is commonly used in
the Philippines, and ten from different countries. Include pictures and descriptions.
PY
Learning Outcome 4:
Store and Reconstitute Stocks, Sauces and Soups
O
Stock is a clear, flavored liquid that freezes well. Chilled stock can be frozen
in 1 gallon amounts to be used for sauces. However, once a stock has been used to
C
make a sauce the sauce itself should not be frozen. Sauces do not freeze well and
should be made in amounts needed on the day of production.
The stock should never be put in the refrigerator while it is hot. The large volume of hot
D
liquid can raise the internal temperature of the refrigerator to the point that the stock
will cool sufficiently within two hours and may warm everything else in the refrigerator.
A good way to cool the stock is to place the hot stock pot in a sink full of cold water
E
and ice cubes until it is lukewarm but it should not exceed one hour. After leaving it
uncovered for the first half hour and stirring occasionally to cool, it should be covered
EP
with an upside down plate to prevent evaporation which would cause the stock to
become too concentrated. Refrigerated stock cools better in shallow pans. If covered,
stock lasts up to five days but it is best if used in two days.
Sauces and starches should be kept in airtight container and stored in a cool dry
place away from the moisture, oxygen, lights, and pests. Food made with starches
contains egg, milk, cream of other dairy products all of which make them prone
to bacterial contamination and to food-borne illnesses. Sauces made with these
ingredients should be kept out of the temperature danger zone. Thickened sauce
should also be prepared, served, and stored with caution. These products should be
stored in the refrigerator and never left to stay for long at room temperature.
Storing Equipment
1. glass/plastic container
2. stock pot
3. refrigerator
231
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Ways to Reconstitute Stocks
1. Skim the surface and strain off the stock through a china cup lined with
several layers of cheesecloth.
2. Cool the stock as quickly as possible as follows:
Set the pot in a sink with blocks, rack or some other object under it.
This is called venting. This allows cold water to flow under the pot or
around it.
Run cold water into the sink, but not higher than the level of the stock.
Stir the pot occasionally so the stocks cool evenly
Cooling stock quickly and properly is important. Improperly cooled
stock may spoil in 6 to 8 hrs.
3. When cool, refrigerate the stock in covered containers. Stock will keep 2
to 3 days if properly refrigerated. Stock can also be frozen and will last for
PY
several months.
O
1. By adding water
2. By using other liquid like evaporating milk, coconut milk, and fruit juices
C
E D
Enhancement Activity
EP
Photo Grid
D
232
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 2 Prepare Poultry
And Game Dishes
Overview
This lesson deals with the selection, preparation, cooking, presentation, and
storage of poultry and game in a commercial kitchen or catering operation.
PY
Learning Outcome 1:
Perform Mise’en Place
O
Selecting and Purchasing Poultry and Game
Poultry consumption in the Philippines has increased remarkably in the last
decade. This is evident in the popularity of chicken dishes in restaurants all over
the country.
C
Poultry refers to several kinds of fowl that are used as food and the term
includes chicken, turkey, duck, pigeon, and quail. These are usually domesticated
D
raised mainly for meat and/or eggs. Birds such as smites that are hunted for food
are games.
E
Pigeon Meat
Guinea fowl Meat
Wild duck Meat, feather
Pheasant Meat
Chickens and other poultry may be divided into classes which are essentially
of the same physical characteristics associated with age, sex, live weight and/or
breed.
233
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Capon.A capon is a surgically desexed male chicken usually under 8 months
of age.
4. Stag A stag is a male chicken, usually under 10 months of age, with coarse
skin, with somewhat toughened and darkened flesh.
5. Hen or Stewing Chicken It is a mature female chicken which is usually more
than 10 months of age. It can also be a culled layer.
6. Cock or Rooster It is a mature male chicken with coarse skin, toughened
and darkened meat and hardened breastbone tip.
7. Jumbo Broiler This is a large chicken about 4 kg. dressed weight which are
on sale especially during the Christmas holiday.
Other Poultry
PY
1. Peking duck This is a breed of duck that originated from China and is noted
for its tender and flavorful meat.
2. Duck or Itik is available and popular in many towns of Rizal as fried itik.
3. Squab This is a young immature pigeon of either sex and has extra tender
meat.
2. Whole Poultry. These are slaughtered birds that have been bled and de-
EP
feathered.
a. Their head, feet and viscera are still intact.
b. They are clean, well fleshed.
c. They have moderate fat coverings.
d. They are free from pin feathers and show no cuts, scars or missing
D
skin.
3. Dressed Poultry. These are slaughtered birds that have been bled, de-
feathered, and the visceral organs are removed.
a. The skin is smooth and yellow in color
b. The breast is plump
c. The thighs are well-developed
d. It has no objectionable odor
e. It is heavy and the skin is not watery
234
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
5. Poultry Parts Several pieces of a single poultry part are usually packed in one
carton, wrapped and chilled or frozen. The various poultry parts are divided
into any of the following:
a. dark meat – drumsticks, thighs, wings, neck, backs, and rib cage
b. white meat – breasts
c. giblets – gizzard and heart
Poultry meat consists of dark and white muscles. Dark muscles are those
PY
found in parts of fowl’s body which are always used. These are the legs, thigh, wings,
neck and rib cage. These are richer in fat, have more connective tissues, and have
higher riboflavin and myoglobin content. Most people prefer the dark meat than white
meat (from the breast) because of its juiciness and flavor. Variety meats refer to the
meat of such organs as the gizzard, heart, kidneys and liver.
O
Preparation of poultry for cooking
• slaughter and bleeding
• scalding
C
• defeathering
• evisceration
• deboning
D
Live poultry
Live poultry should be healthy, alert, and well-feathered. Avoid poultry which have
bruises, blisters and broken bones.
EP
Whole poultry
Though not alive, the criteria for selecting live poultry also apply to whole poultry.
Dressed poultry
D
This is the most available poultry form in the market. Dressed poultry are actually
slaughtered poultry with the head, feet, blood, feathers and internal organs removed.
Good quality dressed poultry should be free from slime, off-odors and discoloration.
Drawn poultry
These are dressed poultry that have been chilled or frozen. They are usually
available in groceries.
Ready-to cook
These are poultry parts such as wings, breast, thighs, or drumsticks which have
been separately packed in a single container and frozen or chilled.
235
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Different Cuts of Poultry
PY
O
Whole Chicken
Whole Chickens are marketed either fresh or frozen.
C
D
Halves
The bird is split from front to back through the backbone
and keel to produce 2 halves of approximately equal
E
weight.
EP
Breast Quarters
Halves may be further cut into which include the wing. A
breast quarter, including portions of the back, is all white
D
meat.
Split Breast
A breast quarter with the wing removed.
236
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Split Breast without Back
A breast quarter with wing and back portion removed.
PY
8-Piece Cut
The whole bird is cut into 2 breast halves with ribs and
O
back portion, 2 wings, 2 thighs with back portion and 2
drumsticks. The parts may be packaged together and
labelled as whole cut-up chicken. These are usually sold
C
without giblets.
D
Whole Chicken Wing
The whole chicken wing is an all-white meat portion
composed of three sections; the drumette, mid-section,
E
and tip.
EP
Wing Drummettes
The first section between the shoulder and the elbow.
D
237
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Wing Mid-Section
The section between the elbow and the tip, sometimes
called the wing flat or mid-joint.
PY
O
Boneless, Skinless Leg
Whole chicken leg with skin and bone removed.
C
D
Thigh
The thigh is the portion of the leg above the knee joint.
E
EP
Drumsticks
Drumsticks include the lower portion of the leg quarter
(the portion between the knee joint and the hock).
238
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Giblets
Includes heart, liver, and neck.
PY
Review of Learning Outcome 1
O
Read each of the following questions carefully and choose the letter of the correct
answer. Write your answer in your test notebook
C
1. What do you call the birds that are hunted for food?
A. game C. poultry
B. livestock D. swine
D
2. What do you call a desexed male chicken usually under 8 months old?
A. broiler C. hen
E
B. capon D. rooster
3. Which of the following poultry originated from China and is noted for its tender and
EP
flavorful meat?
A. chicken C. itik
B. goose D. peking duck
4. What do you call the young immature pigeon of either sex with extra tender meat?
D
A. duck C. rooster
B. fryer D. squab
5. Which of the following classes of poultry is on sale especially during the Christmas
Holiday?
A. broiler C. jumbo broiler
B. capon D. roaster
239
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. Which of the following characteristics is a good quality of a live poultry?
A. free from pin feathers and shows no cuts
B. has clear eye
C. heavy and the skin is watery
D. thighs well develop
PY
10. What is a male chicken under 10 months old?
A. fryer C. rooster
B. hen D. stag
O
C
Enhancement Activity
E D
240
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 2:
Cook Poultry and Game Dishes
Principles of Poultry Cookery
1. The fat distribution and maturity of the fowl affect the quality of the product.
Mature birds are best cooked using moist heat. Dry heat is suitable for young
birds.
2. The best cooking temperature for poultry is at low to moderate heat. This
temperature range produces a more flavorful and tender product. This also
minimizes nutrient loss and shrinkage of meat.
3. To prevent the risk of microbial contamination, stuffing of turkey and chickens
should be done immediately before roasting. It is best not to fill the cavity
completely as this will prevent the poultry from being thoroughly cooked.
PY
4. Because of its susceptibility to microbial growth, cooked poultry should be
eaten immediately or refrigerated if not consumed. Leftover stuffing should be
stored separately to prevent contamination.
5. Because poultry meat is pale-colored, it is best to employ dry heat cooking with
fat for a brown color.
O
6. When roasting chicken, cuts should be placed with the breast-side down to
produce a juicier and tenderer product.
7. To improve the palatability of lean poultry meat, basting can be done.
C
Causes of Food Spoilage and Contamination
All food should be safe and free from contamination and spoilage at all points in
D
its journey from its source until it reaches the consumers. However, food contamination
is a serious public health problem resulting in food borne diseases that affect many
people every year. Hence, awareness of potential sources of food contamination is an
E
Poultry Cookery
Poultry, like meat may be cooked by either dry or moist heat method. The
choice of method depends mainly upon the age of the bird instead of location of the
241
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
part in the carcass as in the case of meats. Fat content should also be taken into
consideration.
PY
for roasting. They are still tender but have more fat than the broilers or fryers.
Older birds need to be tenderized by moist cooking prior to dry heat
cooking.
One point to remember in poultry cookery; moist heat cookery may be
applied to all classes and kinds of poultry but dry heat cookery is reserved for
O
tender birds.
242
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
3. Using the knife, scimitar may be
preferred but a fillet knife would
work well too. Cut along one side of
the breast bone to the base of the
chicken.
PY
4. Separate skin that is attached to
breast from leg quarter.
O
C
5. With your thumb under the wing joint
D
press upward and out to separate
joint.
E
EP
243
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. Here is a picture of detached breast
and wing.
PY
8. Cut around wing joint to remove
wing.
O
C
9. A small thin piece of meat located
on underside of breast that can be
D
removed by pulling the tenderloin,
good for chicken tenders. Repeat
steps 3-9 for the other side of breast.
E
EP
244
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
11. Halfway through you will hit the
joint.
PY
12. Using your thumb push up and
out to snap apart joint.
O
C
13. Finish cut through joint to remove
D
leg quarter. Repeat steps 10-13
for other leg quarter.
E
EP
Deboning Chicken
D
245
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Step 2: At the neck, cut out the wishbone
by pulling the skin up and out of the way
and sliding the knife along the underside
of the wishbone. Continue cutting around
and under the wishbone until it is free and
can be pulled out with your fingers.
PY
Step 3: Turn the bird over, and with breast
side down, cut along the backbone from
the neck to the tail.
O
C
Step 4: With short sharp strokes of your
knife, keeping the knife close to the
D
bones cut the flesh and skin, carefully
using your fingers to pull the flesh away
from the carcass.
E
EP
246
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Step 5: Cut the flesh from the curved
(saber) bone near the wing and remove
the bone.
PY
Step 6: The partially-boned bird with leg
and wing bones left in, is now ready for
stuffing.
O
C
Step 7: While holding the wing bone from
inside the bird, cut through the tendons
D
and scrape the meat from the bone with
the knife. Pull out the bone, using the
knife to free it.
E
EP
247
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Step 9: Repeat Step 7 to remove the leg
bone. Reposition wing and leg meat so
skin side is out.
PY
and ready to be stuffed, rolled, and
roasted.
O
C
Enhancement Activity
E D
EP
248
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
Demonstrate the steps in fabricating and deboning chicken by following the procedures
on page 242.
PY
SCORING RUBRICS
Level
Achieved PERFORMANCE LEVELS
Ask the teacher to
assess your performance
10 - Can perform the skill very
O
in the following critical
satisfactorily without supervision
task and performance
and with initiative and adaptability to
criteria below
problem situations.
C 7 - Can perform the skill satisfactorily
You will be rated based
on the overall evaluation without assistance or supervision.
on the right side. 4 - Can perform the skill less
D
satisfactorily but requires some
assistance and/or supervision.
1 - Can perform parts of the skill
E
supervision.
249
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Preparation and Cooking of Chicken
Chicken Galantina/Relleno
Find a partner and perform the given chicken recipe. Performance activity will be
evaluated based on the given rubric
PY
Ingredients:
• 1 whole chicken, deboned • 3/4 cup chopped Vienna sausage
• ½ k ground pork • 1/2 cup minced onions
• ½ k ground beef • 1/2 cup grated carrot
• 300 g ground chicken • 1/2 cup chopped red bell pepper
O
• 4 pieces sausage • 5 tbsp bread crumbs
• 3 tbsp. sweet pickle relish • 3/4 cup soy sauce
• 1/2 cup raisins • 1 1/2 tsp juice of 1 lemon
• 2 pieces hard boiled eggs
C • 1/2 tsp salt
• 3/4 cup minced ham • ground black pepper
D
Procedure:
1. Combine ground pork, ham, sausage, bell pepper, carrot, onion, raisins, sweet
pickle relish, salt, and pepper. Mix well.
E
2. Add the bread crumbs and then continue mixing. Set aside.
3. Combine lemon juice and soy sauce in a large container. Stir.
4. Marinate the whole chicken in the lemon and soy sauce mixture for 30 minutes.
EP
5. Remove the chicken from the mixture and then stuff with half of the meat and
vegetable mixture.
6. Arrange the boiled eggs inside the chicken and then continue to put-in the rest
of the meat mixture.
7. Secure the chicken by wrapping it in aluminum foil.
D
250
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
PY
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
O
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients. C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
D
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
E
Comments:
251
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Italian Chicken Roll-Ups
Tools and Equipment:
• casserole
• gas or electric stove
• knife
• chopping board
• measuring cup
• measuring spoon
• wooden spoon
• frying pan
Ingredients:
• 8 boneless skinless chicken breast • 1/2 cup grated cheese
PY
halves (4 ounces each) • 1/4 cup minced fresh parsley
• 8 thin slices (4 ounces) ham • 1/2 cup milk
• 4 slices cheese, halved • cooking spray
• 2/3 cup seasoned bread crumbs
O
Procedure:
1. Preheat oven to 425°.
2. Flatten chicken to 1/4-in. thickness.
C
3. Place a slice of ham and half slice of provolone cheese on each piece of
chicken.
4. Roll up from a short side and tuck in ends; secure with a toothpick.
5. In a shallow bowl, combine crumbs, Romano cheese and parsley.
D
6. Pour milk into another bowl. Dip chicken rolls in milk, then roll in crumb
mixture.
7. Place roll-ups, seam side down, on a greased baking sheet. Spritz chicken
E
9. Remove toothpicks.
Yield: 8 servings.
D
252
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet below.
PY
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
O
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
D
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
E
253
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Plate/Present Poultry and Game Dishes
PY
(or exchange) with that.
O
Most of us tend to underestimate the amount of food we eat and tend to
overestimate the recommended portion sizes for many foods. Almost everyone
C
underestimates the amount of calories they consume, and people who weigh more
do so, to a greater degree.
Portion: A “portion” is how much food you choose to eat at one time (breakfast,
D
lunch, dinner, or snack), whether in a restaurant, from a package, or in your own
kitchen. Portions can be bigger or smaller than the recommended food servings.
There is no standard portion size and no single right or wrong portion size.
E
recommended in the Food Guide Pyramid and the Dietary Guidelines for Americans.
Sometimes, the portion size and serving size match; sometimes they do not.
A serving is a standard amount used to help give advice about how much to eat,
or to identify how many calories and nutrients are in a food.
D
254
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Plating/ Presenting Poultry Dishes
Creative Food Presentation Techniques
The way food is presented affects a
person’s perception of how it will taste. People
instinctively reject bruised apples and browned
bananas, and recognize well-marbled beef
and perfectly ripe produce. Prepared dishes
work in the same manner. The perfect dish
includes food that tastes as good as it looks.
PY
components on a plate like interior designers place furniture to create culinary
masterpieces.
O
food presentation tips will set your dishes apart from the crowd.
without saying that hot food should be hot and cold food should be cold; always
check the temperature of your food before you serve it to a guest. After you have
put the food on the plate, check to see that the plate is clean. Plate edges should
be especially immaculate. Clean spills or sauces away with a moistened clean
sponge or paper towel.
D
You can also decorate the rim of a plate, just as you’d decorate a frame.
255
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Use culinary elements like colorful spices or confectioner’s sugar; specialty salts
like Hawaiian alaea or Himalayan pink salt which also lend themselves wonderfully
to this purpose.
For small appetizers, part of the presentation is making the display platter
look beautiful. Make a bed of uncooked soba noodles or flat rice sticks, shafts of
wheat, or large sprigs of fresh herbs like rosemary and thyme. This is also a good
trick to use if you are preparing a hors d’oeuvre platter.
If you’re decorating a plate that will hold hot food, be aware that by the time
you’re finished garnishing the plate, the food may not be hot. In some cases, you
can garnish the plate before you plate the food. If this is impossible, work quickly
and have all of your garnishes close by.
PY
Mix Shapes, Colors and Textures
Food is naturally beautiful. Combine foods
with different shapes, colors and textures on the
same plate. Grilled filet mignon becomes even
O
more decadent when it appears on the plate
with stark white mashed potatoes and a bright
green steamed vegetable.
C
In this case, these different elements
combine for a dish that catches the eye. If
your plate will contain multiple elements,
D
use an odd number of dishes rather
than an even number for further interest. Grilled filet mignon with mashed
potatoes and steamed asparagus looks great, but add a stack of sliced
E
Try to integrate a variety of shapes in each dish. Risotto is boring when paired
with rice, as the two are nearly identical in shape, color and size. Meatballs
and Brussels sprouts are different colors but the same shape. But meatballs
and rice make an interesting combination, as do risotto and Brussels sprouts.
D
Keep in mind that sometimes the most aesthetically pleasing plate of food does
not include a garnish. For example, crème brulee features a delicate, crunchy
top layer. While its appearance can certainly be improved with a small garnish or
beautiful brulee dish, the texture and color of the caramelized sugar is beautiful
enough on its own.
256
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Garnishes
Garnishes can be as simple or intricate as you like. For a twist on the traditional
parsley sprig, use a sprig or two of an herb or spice
that was used in the dish. A ham flavored with
rosemary might feature a sprig of rosemary on each
plate. Spicy pad Thai can include a wedge of lemon
or lime and a dash of paprika sprinkled around the
plate.
PY
are available that will help you transform nearly any fruit into an attractive garnish for
a plate.
The key to selecting a garnish is picking a garnish that will improve the dish.
Garnishes add color and continue a theme, such as a brightly colored orchid on top
O
of passion fruit crème brulee. They can accent a dish’s color, like chives on top of a
baked potato, or a dish’s flavor. C
Garnishes can provide complementary flavor, like peanuts in pad Thai, or
contrasting flavor, like a lemon wedge with seafood. An entrée’s sauce also makes
a delicious garnish. Swirl it around or atop the plate for visual and gustatory interest.
The way food looks on the plate is the most commonly ignored facet of cooking
D
at home. Too often, other considerations such as time, money, and food allergies push
presentation out of mind. Since most children and their families eat their main meals at
E
bacon smile and potato cheeks. You can even trick your own palate into liking Brussels
sprouts, zucchini and other healthy produce with a beautiful arrangement on a dish.
D
257
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 3
Choose the correct answer from the given choices. Write the letter on your answer
sheet.
1. Act of arranging the meal on the individual plate immediately before it’s serving
A. garnishing
PY
B. cooking
C. plating
D. serving
O
A. accessories
B. base
C. body
D. frame
C
3. To enhance in appearance by adding decorative touches
D
A. plating
B. presenting
E
C. garnishing
D. serving
EP
D
258
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 4:
Store Poultry and Game Bird
Techniques in Storing Poultry
Poultry may be frozen whole, in halves, cut into pieces, or parts after they
are dressed. Parts can be packed separately, ready to cook, or for easy meal
preparation and thawing.
PY
paper, placed in shallow utensils and stored in a cold part of the refrigerator near
the freezing unit or ice. Cooked poultry should be cooled as quickly as possible,
covered to prevent drying and refrigerated. Removing the bones saves space.
Frozen poultry must be kept in the freezing unit until it is thawed for cooking.
O
Freezing and Thawing Poultry
To prepare poultry properly for freezing, it should be wrapped tightly in a
C
moisture-vapor proof film, foil or paper and then frozen at -170oC (0oF) or lower.
Although there are no abrupt changes in quality during the first few months of
poultry storage, it has always been a good practice to use these chickens first
which have been in storage longest and those with torn wrapper.
D
Refrigerator (35-
Product Freezer ( 0oF)
40oF)
EP
259
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
frozen poultry or any other market forms of poultry should not be allowed to thaw
or soak in a bowl of water because of possible bacterial build.
PY
Safe Shopping for Chicken and Poultry
During distribution to retail stores, fresh chicken is kept cold in order to extend
its shelf life as well as to prevent bacteria growth. Packages of chicken should feel cold
O
to the touch, and should be among the last items you select before checking out.
Just like meat, fish or any animal-based food product, raw or undercooked
chicken carry certain bacteria. These bacteria can cause illness in large numbers.
specifically, temperatures between 40°F and 140°F — for more than an hour.
And remember, freezing doesn’t kill bacteria, either — it just makes them
cold. The only way to kill food-borne pathogens is by thoroughly cooking the food.
260
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Fresh vs. Frozen Chicken and Poultry
If the label on a raw poultry product bears the term “fresh,” that indicates that
it has never been colder than 26°F. Poultry that has at any time been kept at 0°F or
colder must have a label indicating that it is “frozen” or “previously frozen,” whatever
the case may be.
Interestingly, poultry that has been kept at temperatures colder than 26°F
but warmer than 0°F can be labeled neither fresh nor frozen.
PY
most retailers will date the chicken products that they sell.
If they do opt to date the product, regulations do require that there be a phrase
signifying whether the date is a “sell by” date or a “use before” date, and the
explanation must appear right next to the date.
• Refreezing
Safe steps in food handling, cooking, and storage are essential to prevent
EP
food borne illness. You can’t see, smell, or taste harmful bacteria that may cause
illness. In every step of food preparation, follow the following guidelines to keep
food safe:
Shopping
• Purchase refrigerated or frozen items after selecting your non-perishables.
• Never choose meat or poultry in packaging that is torn or leaking.
• Do not buy food without expiration dates
261
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Storage
• Always refrigerate perishable food within 2 hours (1 hour when the temperature
is above 90 °F).
• Cook or freeze fresh poultry, fish, ground meats, and variety meats within 2
days; other beef, veal, lamb, or pork, within 3 to 5 days.
PY
• To maintain quality when freezing meat and poultry in its original package,
wrap the package again with foil or plastic wrap that is recommended for the
freezer.
O
can be stored on the shelf for 12 to 18 months. Low-acid canned food such
as meat, poultry, fish, and most vegetables will keep 2 to 5 years — if the can
remains in good condition and has been stored in a cool, clean, and dry place.
C
Discard cans that are dented, leaking, bulging, or rusted.
Preparation
D
• Always wash hands with warm water and soap for 20 seconds before and after
handling food.
E
• Don’t cross-contaminate. Keep raw meat, poultry, fish, and their juices away
from other food. After cutting raw meats, wash cutting board, utensils, and
countertops with hot, soapy water.
EP
Thawing
• Refrigerator The refrigerator allows slow, safe thawing. Make sure thawing
meat and poultry juices do not drip onto other food.
• Cold Water For faster thawing, place food in a leak-proof plastic bag. Submerge
in cold tap water. Change the water every 30 minutes. Cook immediately after
thawing.
262
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cooking
• Cook all raw poultry, beef, pork, lamb and veal steaks, chops, and roasts to a
minimum internal temperature of 145 °F as measured with a food thermometer
before removing meat from the heat source. For safety and quality, allow meat
to rest for at least three minutes before carving or consuming. For reasons
of personal preference, consumers may choose to cook meat to higher
temperatures.
• Poultry. Cook all poultry to an internal temperature of 165 °F as measured with
a food thermometer.
Serving
• Hot food should be held at 140 °F or warmer.
PY
• Cold food should be held at 40 °F or colder.
• When serving food at a buffet, keep food hot with chafing dishes, slow cookers,
and warming trays. Keep food cold by nesting dishes in bowls of ice or use
small serving trays and replace them often.
O
Perishable food should not be left out more than 2 hours at room temperature
(1 hour when the temperature is above 90 °F).
C
Left overs
• Discard any food left out at room temperature for more than 2 hours (1 hour if
D
the temperature was above 90 °F).
• Place food into shallow containers and immediately put in the refrigerator or
E
Refreezing
• Meat and poultry defrosted in the refrigerator may be refrozen before or after
D
263
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s See How Much You Learned
Posttest 3
Read and understand the statements/questions below. Choose the letter of the
correct answer and write it on your test notebook.
1. As a chef of a fine dining restaurant, Genie simmers meat, fish, and
vegetables. Which of the following liquids is a by-product after the different
food stuffs have been simmered?
A. glaze C. stock
PY
B. sauce D. water
2. Which of the following stocks uses veal bone as its main ingredient?
A. brown stock C. prawn stock
B. ham stock D. white stock
3. What kind of stock uses fish as its main ingredient?
O
A. brown stock C. glace viande
B. fish stock D. ham stock
4. What stock uses chicken bone as its main ingredient?
A. fish stock C. prawn stock
C
B. ham stock D. chicken stock
5. Among the different types of stock, which one is the easiest to prepare?
A. brown stock C. white stock
D
B. fish stock D. vegetable stock
6. What stock is made by boiling prawn shell?
A. fish stock C. prawn stock
E
saltiness?
A. MSG C. spices
B. salt D. sugar
8. Mrs. Sante will be having visitors for dinner. If she will prepare stock for
their dinner, which of the following flavoring agents will she use to give
D
264
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
12. Which of the following is not a thickening agent?
A. flour C. rice
B. grain D. salt
13. Which of the four basic sauces whose basic ingredient is milk is thickened
with flour enriched with butter?
A. Hollandaise sauce C. veloute sauce
B. savory butter D. white sauce
14. Which among the four basic sauces has a chief ingredient of chicken broth
thickened with flour and enriched with butter seasoning?
A. Hollandaise sauce C. veloute sauce
B. savory butter D. white sauce
15. Which of the four basic sauces has three basic ingredients like butter, egg
yolk, and lemon juice with seasoning for accent?
PY
A. Hollandaise sauce C. white sauce
B. savory butter D. veloute sauce
16. Which of the four basic sauces has a basic ingredient like butter that is
creamed and blended with other ingredients to give individual flavor?
A. Hollandaise sauce C. veloute sauce
O
B. savory butter D. white sauce
17. Which of the following is not a thickening agent?
A. dairy cream C. flour
B. egg D. spice
C
18. What do you call birds that are hunted for food?
A. game C. poultry
B. livestock D. swine
D
19. Which of the following poultry originated from China and is noted for its
tender and flavorful meat?
A. chicken C. itik
E
B. fryer D. squab
21. Poultry is composed of different parts. To which of the following does breast
meat belong?
A. dark meat C. variety meat
B. tough meat D. white meat
D
265
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
25. How do you classify the chicken breast?
A. entrails C. viscera
B. dark meat D. white meat
26. In cookery, we apply different cooking methods depending on the ingredients
that we have. If you will cook a matured poultry, which of the following
methods will you apply?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
27. What cookery method is suitable for the less tender cuts?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. frying D. stewing
PY
28. What is the best cooking temperature for poultry?
A. high temperature C. low to moderate temperature
B. low temperature D. moderate temperature
O
29. What factor affects the poultry meat’s tenderness and juiciness?
A. age C. cuts
B. cookery D. sex
C
30. Which of the following can be done to prevent drying when reheating?
A. cook using sauces and gravy
D
B. overcook the poultry meat
C. remove fat before cooking
D. none of the above
E
EP
D
266
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Quarter 4
Prepare And Cook Meat
Overview
This quarter will enable students or learners to acquire competencies in:
preparing and cooking meat which includes: performing mis’ en place, cooking and
evaluating meat dishes, presenting/plating meat dishes, and storing meat.
Objectives:
At the end of the quarter students are expected to:
PY
1. perform mise ‘en place;
2. cook meat cuts;
3. present and evaluate meat dishes; and
4. store meat.
O
Let’s See What You Know
C
D
Pretest 4
Read the following statements/questions carefully and choose the letter with the
E
B. deer D. sheep
2. Which of the following market forms of meat does not undergo chilling?
A. cured meat C. frozen meat
B. fresh meat D. processed meat
3. What part of the meat helps you identify the less tender cuts?
D
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
4. What part of the meat has the greatest amount of quality protein?
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
5. Which of the following meat cuts requires long and slow cooking
temperature?
A. less tender C. tender
B. slightly tough D. tough
6. What is a long-bladed hatchet or a heavy knife used by a butcher?
A. butcher knife C. cleaver knife
B. chopper knife D. set of slicing knife
267
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. Which of the cooking methods does not belong to dry heat method?
A. baking C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
8. What do you call the cooking method when meat is cooked in steaming
liquid in which bubbles are breaking on the surface?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
9. What is an oil-acid mixture which is used to enhance the flavor of meat?
A. brine solution C. soy sauce and vinegar
B. marinade D. salt and calamansi
10. Which of the following tools is used for carving?
A. cleaver knife C. slicer
B. fork D. razor knife
PY
11. To which meat cut do internal organs belong?
A. less tender cuts C. tough cuts
B. tender cuts D. variety cuts
12. Where should meat products be stored?
A. crisper C. dry shelf
O
B. cold shelf D. freezer
13. Which of the following is the tenderest cut of beef?
A. chunk C. sirloin
B. round cut
C
D. tenderloin
14. When buying meat, what should you consider first?
A. brand C. quality
B. price D. round cut
D
15. What is your primary consideration when storing goods?
A. expiration date C. quantity
B. fragility D. size
E
B. drying D. salting
19. In this method, salt, sugar, potassium, or sodium nitrate, etc. are used in
preserving meat by drying.
A. curing C. freezing
B. dehydration D. salting
20. The following are the characteristics of good quality pork, except ____
A. breast is plump C. no foul odor
B. flesh is pink D. texture is fine and firm
21. A tool used for cutting through bones.
A. butcher knife C. cleaver
B. chef knife D. utility knife
268
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
22. Used for carving and slicing cooked meats.
A. butcher knife C. slicer
B. chef knife D. utility knife
23. A knife used for general purposes.
A. butcher knife C. cleaver
B. chef knife D. utility knife
24. It is used in carving roasts chicken and duck.
A. carving knife C. slicer
B. cleaver knife D. utility knife
25. Used for cutting and trimming raw meats.
A. butcher knife C. cleaver
B. chef knife D. utility knife
26. Meat of swine is called:
PY
A. beef C. chevon
B. carabeef D. pork
27. Veal is the meat of:
A. cattle over 1 year old C. sheep
B. goat D. young calf
O
28. Deer meat is called:
A. beef C. chevon
B. carabeef D. pork
A. beef
C
29. Meat of cattle over 1 year old:
C. pork
B. carabeef D. chevon
30. Meat of sheep is called:
D
A. lamb C. pork
B. carabeef D. chevon
E
EP
D
269
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1 Prepare And Cook Meat
Overview:
This lesson covers the skills, knowledge, and attitudes required to prepare
and cook meat.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of the lesson you are expected to do the following:
1. perform mise’n place;
2. cook meat cuts;
3. present and evaluate meat dishes; and
4. store meat.
PY
Introduction of Meat
Meat is a term for the flesh of cattle (beef and veal), sheep (lamb) and pigs
(pork). Meat comprises water, protein, fat, and various amounts of minerals and
vitamins.
O
Beef is divided into large sections called primal cuts. These beef primal
cuts or “primal” are then broken down further into individual steak and other retail
cuts. A “side” of beef is literally one side of the beef carcass that is split through
C
the backbone. Each side is then halved between the 12th and 13th ribs into sections
called the forequarter and hindquarter.
Pork is divided into large sections called primal cuts. These primal cuts
D
are then broken down further into individual retail cuts.
Pork is another choice, as far as meat types are concerned. Pork is derived
from pig and is classified as red meat. However, this meat is less fatty than beef.
E
Beef is very popular and is used across the globe. This meat is obtained
EP
from cow and is one of the much sought-after types of red meat.
Sheep meat is also a staple food in some parts of the world and is consumed
in many regions. Sheep meat is otherwise known as mutton (meat of mature
sheep) or lamb (immature sheep) also classified as red meat.
D
270
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 1:
Perform Mise’en Place
Types of Knives and their Uses
PY
chicken and duck.
O
3. Boning knife – used for boning raw
C meats and poultry.
D
4. Slicer – used for carving and slicing
cooked meats.
E
EP
271
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Composition of Meat
1. Water – 70% of muscle tissue.
PY
Beef, whole brisket 71% 56%
O
firmer and loses moisture. When protein has
coagulated to the desired degree, the meat is
said to be done.
C
D
3. Fat – 5% of the muscle tissue. The fat in meat
contributes to:
A. Juiciness
E
barding.
B. Tenderness
Marbling separates muscle fibers, making meat
easier to chew.
C. Flavor
D
272
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Structure of Meat
1. Muscle fibers
Lean meat is composed of long, thin muscle fibers
bound together in bundles. These determine the texture or
grain of a piece of meat.
2. Connective tissue
These are network of proteins that bind the muscle fibers together. Connective
tissue is tough. Meats are high in connective tissue if the muscles are more exercised
PY
like meat from legs and the meat comes from older animals.
O
by long, slow cooking with liquid. Moist-heat cooking
methods at low temperature are not effective for
turning a meat high in connective tissue into a tender,
C
juicy finished product. Acid helps dissolve collagen.
2. Elastin
• yellow connective tissue and is not broken down in
D
cooking. Tenderizing can be accomplished only by
removing the elastin, by pounding and by slicing and
grinding.
E
Washing
Generally, the only occasion in which you will have to wash meat is when it comes
into contact with blood during preparation. After washing, dry the food thoroughly
with absorbent kitchen paper.
1. Skinning
D
Most of the meat you dealt with has been already skinned by the supplier.
2. Dicing
Meat are diced when it is cut into cubes for various types of casseroles, stems,
curries, and dishes such as steak, kidney pie and pudding.
3. Trimming
Reasons for trimming:
a. Improve the appearance of the cut or joint
b. Leave as much of the meat intact as possible.
c. Leave an even thickness of fat (where fat is to be left). How much
fat you trim off will depend on the type of meat, preference, and the
cooking process to be used.
d. Remove as much gristles and sinews as possible.
273
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Slicing
It is the cutting of meat by determining the direction of the grain (the muscle
fibers), and cut across the grain. This is particularly important with tougher cuts
such as steak, in which the grain is also quite obvious.You slice meat with―instead
of against―the grain.
5. Seasoning
It is the addition of salt and white or black pepper to improve the flavor of food.
a. Use white pepper or cayenne pepper on food which you want to keep
attractive with white color.
b. Add salt to roast and grill after the meat has browned. Adding salt
before cooking will extract the juices of the meat to the surface, and
slows down the browning reactions (which need high temperature and
dry heat).
PY
6. Coating
The two basic coatings are:
a. Flour – coat the meat before cooking, otherwise the flour becomes
sticky and unpleasant.
b. Bread crumbs – coat the meat in flour, then egg wash (egg wash is
O
made of lightly beaten whole egg with a little water/milk) and finally with
the bread crumbs.
274
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
4. Carabeef – meat from carabao.
PY
6. Veal – flesh of a young calf, 4-5 months old.
Because of its age, it is considered by some to be
O
the finest meat.
C
D
Match
Column A with Column B. Write the letter of your answer in separate sheet.
A.
Column A Column B
_____1. used for cutting through bones A. butcher knife
D
_____2. used for carving and slicing cooked meats B. chef knife
_____3. for general purposes C. cleaver
_____4. carving roast chicken and duck D. utility knife
_____5. used for cutting, trimming raw meats E. slicer
B.
Column A Column B
_____1. young calf A. beef
_____2. goat B. carabeef
_____3. sheep C. veal
_____4. cattle over one year old D. lamb
_____5. carabao E. chevon
275
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 2
Cook Meat Cuts
Meat Dishes and Entrees
In the classical menu, the term entrée refers to the courses after the Grosse
piece. Basically, entrees are divided into cold entrees and hot entrees. Today,
however, the entrees are usually served as the main dish with suitable vegetable
and salad garnishes. Both hot and cold entrees are frequently described as simple
dishes on the menu, where they appear in various categories, such as hot snacks
garnishes for main dishes and specialties of the day. The main difference between
main grosses piece is that the entries are cut up before being cooked. They do
not require the same methods of preparation as the grosses pieces which are
prepared in single large pieces. It is, therefore, not possible to group the two types
PY
of dishes in the same category.
1. Rare – when pressed with a finger, the meat is very soft with jelly like texture.
2. Medium Rare – when pressed with a finger, meat feels springy and resistant
O
3. Medium – when pressed with a finger, meat feels firm and there is a definite
resistance.
4. Well Done – when pressed with a finger the meat feels hard and rough.
C
Nutrient Content of Meat
Meat consists of water protein and fat, with a few minerals and some B vitamins.
D
1. Protein – High-quality protein is the major constituent of meat after water,
accounting for about 20 percent of its weight. Meat contains 7 grams of protein
per ounce.
E
2. Fat – content can vary widely, according to the grade of meat and its cut.
EP
276
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Safe Cooking Temperatures for Various Meat
Meat °C °F
Beef, rare 52 125
Beef, medium 57 135
Beef, medium well 68 155
Beef, well done 71 160
Ground beef 74 165
Pork 71 160
PY
1. Fresh meat – meat that is recently slaughtered, has not been preserved
frozen
2. Chilled meat – meat that is placed in chiller or slightly cold
3. Cured meat – meat preserved by salting, smoking or aging
4. Processed meat –meat preserved by chemical process
Meat Cuts
O
Primary Cuts of Meat
C
Beef
E D
EP
D
277
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Veal
PY
O
C
Lamb
E D
EP
D
278
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Pork
PY
O
C
Marinades
Good marinade will add flavor to your favorite meat and make it more tender
D
and juicy. Making a marinade is very simple. All you need are three basic components.
The first is an acid, such as lemon juice, vinegar, yogurt, or wine. The acid is important
as it breaks down the meat and tenderizes it. The second is oil. This protects and
E
preserves the food while marinated and also when it’s being cooked. The third is
any herb and/or spice. This is what gives a marinade its unique flavor and zest.
EP
Feel free to experiment by grouping one or more ingredients from each component.
279
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Examples of Marinades
Pineapple Marinade
This sweet, fruity marinade works great on any cut of pork or chicken giving
it a great Hawaiian Teriyaki flavor. Try this marinade when you are simply
placing cut strips of pork or chicken over rice. You can make extra marinade
to use as a sauce as long as you keep it separate from the meat
PY
Pork Rib Marinade
This marinade uses a pork rub for the seasoning with vinegar and water to
turn it into a marinade.
Teriyaki Marinade
O
This teriyaki marinade works particularly well with pork and poultry and gives
it a sweet salty taste. C
Mustard-Vinegar Marinade
This is a simple mustard marinade that tenderizes and adds flavor. It works
well on pork or poultry.
D
Source: http://bbq.about.com/od/marinaderecipes/tp/Top-10-Pork-Marinade-
Recipes.htm
E
1. It tenderizes connective
D
280
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. It coagulates protein. Even
meats low in connective tissue
can be tough and dry if cooked
at excessively high heats for too
long.
PY
shrinks protein and results in
excessive moisture lost.
O
C
4. Roasts cooked at low
temperature shrink less and loss
less moisture.
E D
5. Moist heat penetrates meat quickly. To avoid over cooking, meat should be
EP
281
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Dry Heat Cooking
Dry heat cooking refers to any cooking technique where the
heat is transferred to the food item without using any moisture. Dry-heat
cooking typically involves high heat, with temperatures of 300°F or hotter.
Baking or roasting in an oven is a dry heat method because it uses hot air to
conduct the heat. Pan-searing a steak is considered dry-heat cooking because the
heat transfer takes place through the hot metal of the pan.
PY
Roasting and baking are forms of dry-
heat cooking that use hot, dry air to cook food.
Like other dry-heat cooking methods, roasting
and baking brown the surface of the food, which
O
in turn develops complex flavors and aromas.
Both words describe a method of cooking an item by
enveloping it in hot, dry air, generally inside an oven and
C
at temperatures of at least 300°F and often much hotter.
A convection oven, which circulates hot air throughout the oven, can enhance the
browning reaction.
D
Grilling and Broiling
Grilling and broiling are dry-heat cooking
methods that rely on heat being conducted through the
E
Source: http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/dryheatcooking/a/grilling.htm
282
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
then add a small amount of fat and let it gets hot as well, before adding the food to
the pan. This hot fat helps brown the surface of the food. Another key is to avoid
overloading or overcrowding the pan.
Deep-Frying
Since deep-frying involves submerging food
in hot, liquid fat, it might take some time to get used to
the idea that it’s actually a form of dry-heat cooking.
But if you’ve ever seen the violent reaction of hot oil to
even a tiny drop of water, you know that oil and water are a
couple of opposites that has nothing to do with each other.
PY
Moist heat cooking methods include any technique that involves cooking
with moisture — whether it’s steam, water, stock, wine or some other liquid.
Cooking temperatures are much lower, anywhere from 140°F to a maximum of
212°F, because water doesn’t get any hotter than that. Examples of moist-heat
cooking methods include:
O
Simmering
With simmering, the cooking liquid is a bit hotter than poaching
C
from 180°F to 205°F. Here we will see bubbles forming and gently rising
to the surface of the water, but the water still isn’t at a full rolling boil.
Because it surrounds the food in water that maintains a more or less constant
temperature, simmering cooks food very evenly. It’s an excellent choice for culinary
D
preparations including stocks or soups, starchy items such as potatoes or pastas,
and many others.
E
Boiling
The hottest of these three stages is boiling, where the water reaches its
EP
highest possible temperature of 212°F. It’s actually the least likely of the three to
be used for cooking. That’s because the violent agitation caused by the rolling boil
can be too rough on food and will often damage it.
Water at a full boil would be a bad choice for cooking an egg outside its
D
shell, as we do when preparing poached eggs, because the agitation would cause
the egg to fall apart. The same holds true for delicate fish as well as some pastas.
Steaming
Steaming is a moist-heat cooking technique that
employs hot steam to conduct the heat to the food item.
283
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Braising and Stewing
Braising is a form of moist-heat cooking in
which the item to be cooked is partially covered with
liquid and then simmered slowly at a low temperature.
Begin by Searing
Because moist heat does not permit the various browning reactions that
PY
dry heat produces, giving cooked meats the brown, outer crust that also helps to
develop complex flavors and aromas, it’s customary to sear meat in a pan with a
small amount of hot fat before braising it. This step helps to develop flavors as well
as making the meat more appealing visually.
O
How Braising Works
Braising is a good choice of cooking method for cuts of meat that are
tougher or from older animals. The connective tissues that are more prevalent
C
in cuts like this, and which can make meats tough and chewy when improperly
cooked, are slowly dissolved through long, slow application of moist heat. So you
end up with a tender piece of meat.
D
Factors Affecting Choice of Cooking Methods in Meat
1. Cuts of meat
• Tender cuts like ribs and loin cuts
E
284
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Fat content
• Meats high in fat are cooked without
added fat, such as roasting or
broiling
• Meats low in fat are often cooked
with added fat to prevent dryness,
like sautéing, pan frying or braising.
3. Desired quality
• Tenderness is not the only goal of
cooking. Flavor and appearance is
PY
also one of the objectives to get the
desired quality.
O
C
Let’s Do It!
E D
Roasted Meat
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• knife
D
• chopping board
• roasting pan
• rack
• oven
• pan
• serving plate
Materials/ingredients needed:
• meat (any kind) • brown stock
• seasoning • mirepoix
Procedure:
1. Collect all equipment and food supplies. Use roasting pans that have low side
and just large enough to hold the roast.
285
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
2. Prepare a trim meat for roasting.
3. Season meat several hours or the day before.
4. Place meat fat side up on a rack in the roasting pan.
5. Place meat in preheated oven.
6. Roast to desired doneness.
7. Remove roast from oven and let stand in a warm place for 15-30 minutes.
8. Prepare pan gravy from drippings by:
• degrees pan used in roasting meat • simmer for desired time
• add mirepoix and let brown • strain and skim fat
• deglaze with brown stock
9. Slice roast meat across the grain and serve with gravy.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
PY
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
O
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
C
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
D
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
E
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
EP
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
D
286
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
BRAISED SHORT RIBS
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• oven
• string for tying
• pan
• ladle
• strainer
Ingredients Needed:
• 25 kg short rib sections • 25 l brown stock
• 250 ml oil • 150 ml tomato puree
• 300 g onions • 2 pcs. bay leaves
• 150 g celery • salt to taste
• 150 g carrots • pepper to taste
PY
• 150 g bread flour
Procedure:
1. Tie the short ribs so the meat will stay on the bone during cooking.
2. Dry the meat so it will brown easily.
O
3. Heat the oil in a heavy skillet until very hot. Brown the meat on all sides.
Transfer browned meat to a browning pan.
4. Sauté onions, celery and carrot to the skillet until lightly browned.
C
5. Stir in the bread flour to make a roux.
6. Add the brown stock and tomato puree. Simmer until thickens.
7. Add bay leaf and season to taste with salt and pepper.
8. Pour the sauce over the steaks. Cover and braise until tender.
D
9. Transfer the steaks in a serving plate.
10. Strain the sauce and pour over steaks.
E
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
EP
287
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
and pot holders.
b. Learner observes proper sanitary handling of food.
PY
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
O
Comments:
C
Broiling/Grilling Meats
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• broiler or griller
D
• brush for meat
• fork
• knife
E
• tong
• ladle
EP
Ingredients Needed:
• Meat
• Oil
• Salt and pepper to taste
Procedure:
D
1. Collect and prepare all equipment and supplies. Trim excess fat from
meats to avoid flare-ups.
3. Brush the meat with oil, or dip it in oil and let excess drip off. Place the meat
on the broiler or grill. The oil helps prevent sticking and keeps the product
moist.
4. When one side is brown and the meat is cooked halfway, turn it over with a
fork (piercing only the fat, not the meat, or juices will be lost) or tongs.
5. Cook the second side until the meat is cooked to the desired doneness. If
288
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
the meat is to be brushed with a glaze or sauce, it is usually best to wait
until the product is partially cooked on each side before applying the first
coat. After the meat has been cooked on both sides ½ to ¾ done, brush
the top with a light coat of the sauce. Turnover and repeat as necessary.
PY
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
O
a. The dish tastes delicious.
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
C
B. Procedures
1. Use of Resources:
D
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
E
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
EP
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
Score: (maximum 46 points)
Comments:
289
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
MORCON
Tools and Equipment Needed:
• measuring spoon
• measuring cup
• knife
• weighing scale
• pot or pressure cooker
Ingredients Needed:
• 1k beef, sliced 1/4 inch thick (3 • 100 grams grated cheddar cheese
pcs.) • 2 onions, chopped
• ¼ k ground beef liver • 5 pcs. bay leaf (laurel)
• 200 grams sliced sausages or ham • ½ tsp ground black pepper
PY
• 200 grams pork fat (cut is strips) • ½ cup vinegar
• 3 pcs. hard boiled eggs, sliced • 2 tsp. salt
• 100 grams cheddar cheese in • 2 cups water
strips • 2 meters thread or string (for tying)
O
Procedure:
1. Spread and stretch the sliced beef on your working table.
2. Arrange the filling on the sliced beef: sausage strips, cheese strips, sliced
eggs, pork fat and some ground liver.
C
3. Roll the sliced beef with all the filling inside and secure with a thread or
string.
4. Repeat the procedure for the two remaining beef slices.
D
5. On a pot, place the beef rolls and put the water, the remaining ground liver,
grated cheese, chopped onions, bay leaves, ground black pepper and salt.
6. Cover the pot and bring to a boil. Simmer for one hour.
E
7. Add the vinegar and continue to simmer for another hour or until beef is
tender.
EP
8. Slice the beef morcon, arrange on a platter, and top with the sauce/ gravy.
Cooking Tips:
D
290
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Evaluate your finished product and performance using the score sheet.
Very Good Good Fair Poor
(4) (3) (2) (1)
A. Products:
1. General Appearance
a. The dish is attractive to look at and appetizing.
b. The dish has good color combination
c. The ingredients are cooked just right.
d. The dish has the correct consistency.
2. Palatability
a. The dish tastes delicious.
PY
b. The dish tastes just right.
3. Nutritive value
a. The dish is highly nutritious.
B. Procedures
O
1. Use of Resources:
a. Learner keeps working table orderly while preparing
the ingredients.
C
b. Learner uses only the proper and needed utensils
and dishes.
c. Learner uses time-saving techniques and devices.
D
2. Cleanliness and sanitation
a. Learner is well-groomed and properly dressed for
cooking, uses a clean apron, hairnet, hand towels
E
3. Conservation of nutrients
a. Learner follows proper preparation and cooking
procedures.
b. Learner followed the recipe correctly.
D
291
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 3:
Plate/Present Meat Dishes
PY
2. The food should be easy to handle and
serve, so one portion can be removed
without ruining the arrangement.
O
C
3. Simple arrangements are easier to serve,
and more likely to be still attractive when
they are half demolished by the guests.
E D
292
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
How to Present Food on a Plate
When you’re plating food, the goal is to create a dining experience that
tempts all of the senses, not just the palate. When food looks appetizing the body
actually produces more fluids that aid in nutrient absorption - so you might even
say that beautiful food is more wholesome than food that doesn’t look appealing.
To achieve restaurant-quality presentation, start with brightly-colored, well-cooked
food. Layer the food and play with contrasting colors and textures to increase its
visual appeal. Finally, garnish the plate with flavorful herbs or spices to take it to
the next level. See Step 1 and beyond to learn how to make the next meal you will
cook look irresistible.
PY
• A plate of food looks most appealing when
there’s a high level of contrast in colors.
• When you’re planning meals, think ahead
about the colors you want to feature on the
plate. You might not be able to represent all
O
the colors of the rainbow at every meal, but
challenge yourself to have as much color as possible.
• If you’re about to serve several like-colored foods, like grilled chicken and
C
mashed potatoes, adding a serving or two of fruits and vegetables is a fantastic
and easy way to add pops of color. The richest greens, oranges, reds, purples,
blues, pinks and yellows on your plate probably take the form of fruits and
vegetables.
D
• If you’re not sure how to add color, utilize garnishes. Nearly any savory dish
is well-served by a sprinkling of fresh chives, parsley, dill, or mint. Lemon and
lime wedges are welcome alongside poultry and seafood dishes.
E
• The way you cook your vegetables has a lot of bearing on the overall visual
effect of a meal
• Lightly steam instead of boiling. Steaming vegetables makes them look
appetizing and flavorful, while boiling creates the opposite effect.
• Roast or sauté them with a little oil or butter. Roasted or sautéed vegetables
look quite appetizing when they’re allowed to caramelize a little in oil or butter.
D
293
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Cook fried foods carefully.
• Underdone or overcooked fried foods are difficult to present in an appealing
way. Fried foods can look beautiful on a plate, but it’s important to fry them well
and have a plan for dealing with the oil so it doesn’t muck up the rest of the
dish. Cook fried foods until they’re golden brown, then let them drain on a plate
lined with paper towels to absorb the extra oil. Otherwise, the food will leave
streaks of grease on the plates.
• Fried foods often continue browning a bit after they’ve been removed from the
hot oil.
PY
difficult to chew and swallow, it won’t matter how perfectly colorful it looks. Take
pains to cook food well so that it comes out to the right texture.
• The way you handle the food just after it has been cooked, and before it is
plated, can really affect the texture. Pasta, for example, should be kept in water
or tossed in a bit of oil just after cooking so that it doesn’t start to clump. Fried
O
foods should not be covered with airtight lids, because the heat from the food
will end up steaming the breading and causing the food to get soggy.
• Once the food is on the plate, a spritz of oil or water can improve its visual
appeal if it looks too dry.
C
Experiment with interesting shapes.
• Cutting vegetables in interesting shapes
D
can make the simple become special. You
can cook and serve vegetables, desserts,
pot pies and other foods inside unique-
E
294
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Limit portion sizes.
• Only fill about two thirds of each plate with food. The rest of the plate should
be left empty. The negative space will provide contrast with the food, making it
look more appetizing. If the plate is loaded with food, the food itself won’t look
as visually pleasing. Keep standard serving sizes in mind and aim to serve just
the right amount of each part of the dish.
• As a general rule, half of the food on the plate should comprise of vegetables,
one fourth meat or another protein, and one fourth starch.
• Start plating food in the center of the dish and work outward from there, so that
the food is centered in the middle of the plate.
PY
having an even number. It creates the impression that piece of food is being
framed by the others. Keep this in mind whether you’re serving different types
of food or more than one piece of the same food. For example, if you’re serving
scallops, serve either 3 or 5 instead of 4.
O
Play with different textures
• Creating a texture contrast is a good way to draw the eye. Too many soft
or crunchy foods on a plate are unappealing, but a combination of both is
C
delicious. Different textures harmonize to create a pleasing dining experience.
Leaving one of the elements out would result in a less appealing dish.
• To quickly add some crunch to a dish, try topping it with some crushed, roasted
walnuts and almonds
D
Layer foods to add height.
• It’s common to see food layering in
E
serve the protein on a bed of starch. For example, serve a kabob on a heap of
rice, or serve grilled swordfish on a pile of mashed potatoes.
• Aim to make foods look bigger, not smaller. Fluff up your salads. For example,
instead of smooching them down, create a little cross-hatched stack of cooked
asparagus instead of presenting it in one flat layer.
Use sauce wisely
• If you’re serving a curry, stew or soupy casserole, drain the food of its sauce
before serving, then pour on just the right amount when you plate the dish.
That way you can control the amount of sauce and use it to make the dish look
decorative.
295
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Keep up with food styling trends.
• Remember that styles change even within the space of a few years or even
months; keep up-to-date by checking out cooking magazines, cooking or foodie
websites and cooking shows for current ideas.
PY
or flavored oil. For sweet dishes, adding chocolate sauce, fruit jam, or crème
anglaise might be the most delicious way to add that finishing touch.
• Rather than just pouring a sauce over your food, consider putting it in a squeeze
bottle so you can create a pretty swirl or pattern. If you don’t have a squeeze
bottle, put the sauce in a plastic food storage bag, cut a small piece off one of
O
the corners, and squeeze the sauce through the bag.
• Don’t overdo it. The key is to add a touch of color, flavor and texture without
overpowering the main part of the dish.
296
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
THE 5 BASIC ELEMENTS OF PLATING
Create a Framework
Start with drawings and sketches to visualize the plate. Find inspiration from a
picture or object. Assemble a ‘practice’ plate to work on executing your vision.
Keep It Simple
Select one ingredient to focus on and use space to simplify the presentation.
Clutter distracts from the main elements of your dish that might confuse the diners on
what to focus on.
PY
the presentation should never overpower flav;or and function.
O
and vegetables to create a nutritionally balanced meal.
Select the best answer. Write only the letter on your answer sheet
1. In platter presentation, the uncut portion of the main food item is
D
297
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Learning Outcome 4:
Store meat
Methods of Preserving Meat
There are different methods of preserving meat. These include drying or
dehydration, smoking, salting, curing, refrigerating, freezing, canning and freeze
drying.
A. Drying – This is the most common method of preserving meat. Drying involves
the reduction of the original 70% of water content of the meat to about 15%.
The removal of the moisture content does three things, namely:
• Enzymatic changes are retarded;
• Growth of microorganisms is much hampered
PY
• Microbes lose water and become inert.
O
means of drying meat. Dryers with screen covers are recommended for
outdoor use and lengthens the storage life of meat
2. Dehydration or artificial drying – Oven is used for drying the meat.
C
Although this is more expensive than sun drying, dehydration is a more
efficient method of removing moisture from meat. Products dried in this
way are of higher quality and can be sold at better prices.
B. Smoking – Meat is smoked to create a distinctive color and flavor, thus
D
helping its preservation. The flavor, color, and attractive glaze on the surface
of the meat is desired like in ham, bacon, and tinapA. The heat generated
during smoking destroys the enzymes and dries the product artificially, thus
E
preventing the growth of molds and vegetative bacteria on the surface. Cold
and hot smoking are the two types of smoking. Smoked meats include ham,
EP
C. Salting – Salt improves the keeping quality of meat. It removes the water from
the tissue of the meat and the cells of spoilage organisms that may be present
in the meat.
D. Curing – In this method, salt, sugar, potassium or sodium nitrate, and other
curing elements such as ascorbic acid, phosphate blend, and spices are used
298
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
to prolong the keeping quality of meat. Curing agents also help improve the
flavor and appearance of meat and retain its original color. Sugar minimizes
the hardness of the straight cure process. It also makes the product more
appetizing and provides energy to the nitrate-reducing bacteria which gives the
red color. Spices give the desired flavor and aroma.
PY
G. Canning – Meat preserved by canning is packed in sealed cans or jars which
are subjected to a temperature of 100ºC and above 5-7 kilo pressured for
a specific period of time. This process destroys the organism that causes
spoilage. It maintains the high quality of meat product and extends its life for
O
about a year.
H. Freeze Drying – The process involves the removal of moisture from the meat
C
tissues by transforming the moisture content into ice and gas. The product to
be dried is first frozen and the ice is sublimed from the frozen mass, removing
98% of the water content. The remaining moisture is further reduced to 0.5%
or lower by subjecting the product to high temperature as possible without
D
destroying it.
The texture, appearance, flavor, and nutritive value of freeze dried
products are comparable to frozen foods. The products have a long shelf life
E
Sausages of good quality are uniform in size and length. Each sausage in a
whole piece has no rupture of casing even when pricked. The interior has a pinkish
color when thoroughly cooked. A combination of juicy meat with spicy seasoning
marks their flavor.
299
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Processed food held in storage should be well-covered or wrapped to keep
them from absorbing odors and flavors from other foods. They should be held below
danger zone temperatures. Processed meat should be packed in desired and easy
to thaw market units. Thawing a 25 kilo pack of ground meat, for example, will
be difficult. Systematic freezing of food in quantity for long-term storage requires
special freezing equipment.
PY
poultry)
fresh pork (not ground) -18 to 29
3-6 months, in original package
sausage, ground meat 1-3 months, in original package
18 to 29
cold cuts, sliced 3-5 days, in semi-moisture proof paper
3 to 4
cured bacon 1-4 weeks, tightly wrapped
3 to 4
O
ham (tender cured) 1-6 weeks, tightly wrapped
3 to 4
ham (canned) 3 to 4
6 weeks, in original container
dried beef (unopened)
3 to 4
C
6 weeks, tightly wrapped
Most canned foods can be stored at room temperature in a cold place and
hold their eating quality for several months. They are safe to eat as long as there is
no bulge on the can. Below 24ºC is a good temperature for storage. Canned ham
D
and other perishable meats should be stored in the refrigerator unless storage
recommendations on the can state otherwise. These meats should not be frozen.
E
300
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Techniques in Storing Meat
Storage Procedures for Meat Products
Safe Storage
• Meat is among the most perishable foods. This perishable ability makes it a
potentially hazardous food. At ambient temperatures, meat spoils so fast. It is
therefore necessary to keep it in chilled storage.
Storing
• Take time to store the food items. Store new purchases behind old ones and
always use the old stock first. It is easy to put new purchases at the front.
However, older stocks are overlooked and thus cause spoilage. These
may include cereal and cereal products, sweeteners, oils, seasonings, and
PY
unopened cans and jars. Do not use kitchen cabinets above the refrigerator,
stove, or oven for food storage.
• Never use the area under the sink for storing food because openings around
water and drain pipes are impossible to seal. Pipes may leak and damage the
food.
O
• If you reuse glass jars, wash them thoroughly, wipe, and air-dry before using.
This helps remove any trace of odors that may remain.
C
1. Refrigerator storage
• A refrigerator provides cold temperature for storing perishable
foods such as dairy products, meat, fish, poultry, eggs, fruits, and
vegetables.
D
• Protein foods should be stored in the coldest part of the refrigerator.
Fruits and vegetables can be stored in less cold sections or in a
special compartment such as the crisper.
E
• If refrigerated foods are not properly wrapped, they will dry out and
lose nutrients and flavor. Food should be well covered with plastic,
foil or wax paper, or should be put in tightly covered containers.
EP
2. Freezer storage
D
• For proper freezing and storage, the temperature inside the freezer
should be 18ºC or lower.
• Store frozen foods in their original packages. Foods to be frozen
should be put in moisture-vapor proof wrapping.
• If plastic containers are used, allow about 2.5 cm of headspace at
the top between the food and the lid so the food can expand when
if freezes.
• Thaw frozen foods in the refrigerator. Do not allow food to thaw at
room temperature. At this point, microorganisms will begin to grow.
• Our sanitary laws and regulations are so designed to safeguard
and promote health.
301
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Bacteria are all around us, but they are so small that they cannot be
seen by the naked eye. There are hundreds of different kinds of bacteria. Some
harmless bacteria are useful and necessary such as those essential in preparing
cheese. Other bacteria are essential in agriculture and industry. However, many
types of bacteria are dangerous and cause diseases if allowed to multiply and be
transmitted to humans.
Food contaminated with bacteria can make people sick. Some of the
common illnesses are salmonellosis, perfringens poisoning, staphylococcal
poisoning, and botulism.
PY
bacteria already present do not have much chance to multiply.
Bacteria enter food in two ways. Some are naturally present in food when
you buy it. Others get in because of careless handling when food is prepared and
served. Bacteria cannot travel by themselves; they are carried about by people,
O
animals, and insects as well as objects. Salmonella bacteria, for instance, can be
found in food such as raw meat, poultry, eggs, and dairy products. From these
foods, the bacteria contaminate other foods in the kitchen.
C
Staphylococcus bacteria are found not only in raw meat but in food handlers
with poor personal hygiene. The bacteria from food handlers can be transmitted to
the food through sneezing and coughing.
D
Bacteria thrive on food, moisture, and the right temperature in order to
grow. With carelessness, these growing conditions can occur in any kitchen.
E
EP
D
302
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s Do It!
PORK TOCINO
Standard recipe developed by Calamba Manpower
PY
• knife
• chopping board
• mortar and pestle
• strainer
• measuring cup
O
• measuring spoon
• wooden spoon
• mixing bowl
C
Ingredients Needed:
• 1 k Pork , slice thinly
• 1 tbsp salt
D
• ½ tsp curing salt
• 1 tbsp phosphate
• ¼ cup water
E
Second mixture
• 1 cup garlic
EP
• 2 tbsp garlic
• 2 tbsp Anisado wine or rum
• 1 tsp meat enhancer (optional)
• ¼ cup pineapple juice
• 2 tsp oyster sauce
D
Procedure:
1. In a bowl, combine all ingredients for the 1st mixture together. Set aside.
2. On another bowl, mix all ingredients for the 2nd mixture.
3. Combine 1st and 2nd mixture.
4. Pack it by 250 grams.
303
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Let’s See How Much You Learned
Posttest 4
Read the following statements/questions carefully and choose the letter with the
correct answer. Write your answer in your test note book.
1. From what animal can you derive veal meat?
A. calf C. hog
B. deer D. sheep
2. Which of the following market forms of meat does not undergo chilling?
PY
A. cured meat C. frozen meat
B. fresh meat D. processed meat
3. What part of the meat helps you identify the less tender cuts?
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
O
4. What part of the meat has the greatest amount of quality protein?
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
C
5. Which of the following meat cuts requires long and slow cooking
temperature?
A. less tender C. tender
B. slightly tough D. tough
D
6. What is a long-bladed hatchet or a heavy knife used by a butcher?
A. butcher knife C. cleaver knife
B. chopper knife D. set of slicing knife
E
7. Which of the cooking methods does not belong to dry heat method?
A. baking C. roasting
EP
B. broiling D. stewing
8. What do you call the cooking method when meat is cooked in steaming
liquid in which bubbles are breaking on the surface?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
D
304
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
13. Which of the following is the tenderest cut of beef?
A. chunk C. sirloin
B. round cut D. tenderloin
14. When buying meat, what should you consider first?
A. brand C. quality
B. price D. round cut
15. What is your primary consideration when storing goods?
A. expiration date C. quantity
B. fragility D. size
16. These are taken from the internal organs of animals.
A. less tender cuts C. tough cuts
B. tender cuts D. variety cuts
17. A slaughtered animal is called ______________.
PY
A. a carabeef C. a pork
B. a carcass D. a poultry
18. The most common method of preserving meat is________________.
A. curing C. refrigerating
B. drying D. salting
O
19. In this method, salt, sugar, potassium, or sodium nitrate, etc. are used in
preserving meat by drying.
A. curing C. freezing
B. dehydration
C
D. salting
20. The following are the characteristics of good quality pork, except ____.
A. breast is plump C. no foul odor
B. flesh is pink D. texture is fine and firm
D
21. A tool used for cutting through bones.
A. butcher knife C. cleaver
B. chef knife D. utility knife
E
305
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
28. Deer meat is called:
A. beef C. chevon
B. carabeef D. pork
29. Meat of cattle over 1 year old:
A. beef C. pork
B. carabeef D. chevon
30. Meat of sheep is called:
A. lamb C. pork
B. carabeef D. chevon
PY
O
A. Multiple Choice
Read the following questions carefully and choose the letter that best
describes the statement. Write your answer on your test notebook.
C
1. Which of the following sources of starch is rarely used in manufacturing
food starch?
A. cassava C. potato
D
B. corn D. rice
2. Which of the following starch properties/reactions is the resistance to flow,
E
3. Which of the following is suggested if you will hold pasta for a short time
for later service?
A. Cook pasta ahead of time and chilled
B. Drain and add sauce
C. Drain, toss with a small amount of oil, cover and hold in warmer
D
306
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
7. Which of the following is the right step-by-step procedure in manual
dishwashing?
A. Drain and air-dry, scrape and pre-rinse, rinse, sanitize, and wash
dishes.
B. Rinse, scrape and pre-rinse, wash, drain, air-dry and sanitize dishes
C. Scrape and pre-rinse, rinse, wash, sanitize, drain and air-dry dishes
D. Scrape and pre-rinse, wash, rinse, sanitize, drain and air-dry dishes
8. Which of the following parts of an egg is produced by the oviduct and
consist of four alternating layers of thick and thin consistencies?
A. air cell C. chalaza
B. albumen D. yolk
PY
9. Egg contains high quality protein with all the essential amino acids. Which
of the following vitamins is not found in eggs?
A. B C. D
B. C D. K
10. The appearance of an egg is important for consumer appeal. How are egg
O
shells evaluated?
A. cleanliness, shape, texture and soundness
B. grade, texture, cleanliness, shape
C
C. shape, texture, cleanliness and size
D. texture, soundness, size and cleanliness
11. Which of the following market forms of eggs is seldom used in cooking?
A. dried egg C. frozen egg
D
B. fresh egg D. shelled egg
12. Which of the following raises the coagulation temperature, producing softer,
weaker gel when added to egg used in culinary?
E
A. alkali C. sugar
B. salt D. vinegar
13. What kind of egg dish is prepared by slipping shelled eggs into barely
EP
simmering water and gently cooking until the egg holds its shape?
A. fried egg C. scrambled egg
B. poached egg D. soft-boiled egg
14. Which of the following tools is not used in cooking an omelet?
A. bowls C. sauté pan
D
B. fork D. skimmer
15. Which of the following is true in plating egg dishes?
A. Choose a serving dish small enough to let each food item stand out
B. Play with color and texture
C. Protein dish should cover half of the plate
D. Use even numbers in setting the dish.
16. From what animal can you derive veal meat?
A. calf C. hog
B. deer D. sheep
17. Which of the following market forms of meat does not undergo chilling?
A. cured meat C. frozen meat
B. fresh meat D. processed meat
307
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
18. What part of the meat helps you identify the less tender cuts?
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
19. What part of the meat has the greatest amount of quality protein?
A. bone C. flesh
B. fat D. ligament
20. Which of the following meat cuts requires long and slow cooking
temperature?
A. less tender C. tender
B. slightly tough D. tough
21. What do you call the young immature pigeon of either sex with extra tender
meat?
A. duck C. rooster
PY
B. fryer D. squab
22. What part of poultry does breast meat belongs?
A. dark meat C. variety meat
B. tough meat D. white meat
23. Which of the following characteristics is a good quality of live poultry?
O
A. Free from pin feathers and shows no cuts
B. Eyes are clear
C. Skin is heavy and watery
D. Thighs well develop
C
24. What do you call a young chicken that is usually 9 to 12 weeks of age?
A. fryer C. roaster
B. hen D. stag
D
25. How many days should a whole chicken be refrigerated?
A. 1 day C. 2 to 4 days
B. 1 to 2 days D. 3 to 4 days
E
B. frying D. stewing
29. What is the best cooking temperature for poultry?
A. high temperature
B. low temperature
C. low to moderate temperature
D. moderate temperature
30. What factor affects the poultry meat’s tenderness and juiciness?
A. age C. cuts
B. cookery D. sex
31. What do you call a long-bladed hatchet or a heavy knife used by a butcher?
A. butcher knife C. cleaver knife
B. chopper knife D. set of slicing knife
308
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
32. Which of the cooking methods does not belong to dry heat method?
A. baking C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
33. What cooking method is performed when meat is cooked in steaming liquid
and bubbles are breaking on the surface?
A. boiling C. roasting
B. broiling D. stewing
34. What is an oil-acid mixture which is use to enhance the flavor of meat?
A. brine solution C. soy sauce and vinegar
B. marinade D. salt and calamansi
35. Which of the following tools is used for carving?
A. cleaver knife C. slicer
B. fork D. razor knife
PY
36. To which meat cut do internal organs belong?
A. less tender cuts C. tough cuts
B. tender cuts D. variety cuts
37. Where should meat products be stored?
A. crisper C. dry shelf
O
B. cold shelf D. freezer
38. Which of the following is the tenderest cut of beef?
A. chunk C. sirloin
B. round cut
C D. tenderloin
39. When buying meat, what should you first consider?
A. brand C. quality
B. price D. round cut
D
40. What is your primary consideration when storing goods?
A. expiration date C. quantity
B. fragility D. size
E
41. What is the flavor component of vegetables which gives strong flavor and
odor to some vegetables like onions, leeks, garlic, chives, cabbage, and
broccoli?
EP
A. flavonoids C. sugar
B. glutamic acid D. sulfur compounds
42. Which is a way of cooking by placing blanched or raw vegetables in the pan,
adding liquid (stock, water, wine) then covering and cooking it slowly?
A. boiling C. braising
D
B. baking D. sautéing
43. Which of the following plating styles is not a classic arrangement?
A. The starch or vegetable item is heaped in the center while the main
item is sliced and leaned up against it.
B. The main item is in the center, with vegetable distributed around it.
C. The vegetable item is in front and main item, starch item and garnish
at the rear.
D. The main item is in the center with neat piles of vegetables carefully
arranged around.
44. Which of the following vegetables is cooked uncovered?
A. fruit vegetables C. roots and tubers
B. green vegetables D. yellow vegetables
309
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
45. Which of the following is a freshwater fish?
A. bluefish C. grouper
B. cat fish D. sole
46. Which is the market form of fish wherein both sides of a fish are still joined
but bones are removed?
A. butterfly C. fillet
B. drawn D. steak
47. Which of the following is a characteristic of fresh fish?
A. Fresh and foul odor
B. Eyes are dull, shiny and bulging
C. Red or pink gills
D. Flesh shrinks when pressed
48. Which of the following seafoods is cooked just enough to heat to keep juicy
PY
and plump?
A. fat fish C. flat fish
B. lean fish D. shellfish
49. What is the cooking method suited to fat fish?
A. baking C. deep -frying
O
B. boiling D. sautéing
50. What is used to baste lean fish to help prevent it from drying up?
A. butter C. soy sauce
B. cream
C D. tomato sauce
E D
EP
D
310
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Synthesis
Over the past years, a transition in cooking and food preparation skills has
been observed. This transition in cooking and food preparation skills involves the
increased use of readily prepared or cooked food, which requires less preparation
and time than the traditional way of cooking. But cooking is an expression of
creativity, happiness, magic, and culture. The satisfaction gained by the chef and
other persons preparing, cooking, serving and storing the food is unquestionable;
not to mention the pleasure it gives to the customer.
Different food products may come and go but the demand for food cooked
in traditional way, in restaurants, food chains, and others is indispensable. Varieties
PY
of foods such as egg, cereal and starch, vegetables, seafood, red meat, poultry
dishes and also stocks, soups and sauces are still made available to meet the
customer’s satisfaction.
Taste is not the only sense that can motivate customers but touch also play
O
with contrasts of temperatures and textures, and so with smell and sight for colors,
shapes and others, whereby the five senses become one of the main points of
reference in the creative cooking process.
C
Now, if you have a passion for delicious food and love for cooking, gain
applicable and practical guidance that will teach you to become successful chef or
businessman in the field of cookery someday.
E D
EP
D
311
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
GLOSSARY
PY
birefringence When starch granules are viewed under the microscope
using polarized light, they exhibit a phenomenon known as
birefringence. The refraction of polarized light by the intact
crystalline regions in starch give characteristic “Maltese cross”
patterns on each granule. The disappearance of these crosses
on heating a starch suspension can be used to determine
O
gelatinization temperature.
bouillon a clear soup from beef, chicken, and other meat
broth
C
a fluid food made by boiling meat and vegetable in water
butcher a person who slaughters animals for food
chowder a soup usually of clams or fish, stewed vegetables often in milk
D
clarification to make or become clear
coating to cover with flour
combine to mix the ingredients in the bowl
E
312
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
freeze to preserve meat by refrigeration below freezing point
frozen subject to long and serve cold, chilly or cold manner
fumet the savory color of meat while cooking
games birds that are hunted for food
Haugh unit for describing egg freshness, based on the thickness of the
albumen
leavener substances that are used to make bread and other baked goods
rise
marinade an oil-acid mixture used to give flavor and to tenderize meat
mirepoix a mixture of vegetable, herbs, and spices with or without meat,
used to enhance flavor of meat, fish and shell fish
PY
perishable food subject to decay or spoilage
pheasant long tailed domesticated bird
plump fleshy
poach to cook food in hot liquid in such a manner that it retains its
original shape
O
portion a part of whole or to divide into parts
processed food meat processed by curing ingredients
quality characteristics
C
reconstitute to add appropriate amount of water to sauce or soup
roux a melted butter mixed with brown flour for thickening soup and
D
grains
sanitation keeping the food equipment, utensils, and work area clean
sauce a thickened liquid used to flavor and enhance other food
E
313
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
thaw to change from a frozen solid to a liquid by gradual warming
tough cut part of meat that requires longer period of cooking
veloutes a rich white sauce made by thickening chicken or veal stock
with flour and water.
vermin various small animals or insects such as rats or cockroaches
that are destructive, annoying or hazardous to health.
wastage loss by use
white meat ncludes the white, fleshy part of the chicken such as the breast
PY
O
C
E D
EP
D
314
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
References
Bean, M.M. & Yamazaki, W.T. (1978). Wheat starch gelatinization in sugar
soutions. I. Sucrose: Microscopy and viscosity effects. Cereal Chemistry
55(6): 936-944.
Belmonte, L. M., & Del Mundo, P. B. (1993). Philippine Fiesta Recipe. pp. 82, 87
and 146.
PY
Carson, Byrta, M.S., et.al. (1980). How you Plan and Prepare Meals, 3rd edition.
Chicago, IL: McGraw-Hill, Inc. pp. 353-363.
Chapelle, E. Around the Kitchen: Seven Ways to Present Food Like a Chef.
Retrieved from: http://startcooking.com/seven-ways-to-present-food-like-
a-chef
O
Chavez, L. C., (2006). Meat Safety. Basic Foods for Filipinos 4th Edition. pp. 323-
350
C
Chavez, L. L., De Leon, S. Y., & Claudio, V. S. (2006). Basic Foods for Filipinos,
4th edition. Manila: Merriam and Webster Bookstore, Inc.
D
Competency-based Learning Materials: Food Trades Level III. Fourth Year
E
De Leon, Sonia Y., Ph.D et al., Basic Foods for Filipino, 1999, pp. 231-253
Eggs 101: Egg Storage, Freshness & Food Safety. Retrieved from: http://www.
EP
eggs.ca/eggs101/view/39/egg-storage-freshness-and-food-safety
of Education
Johnson, J.M., Davis, E.A., & Gordon, J. (1990). Interactions of starch and sugar
water measured by electron spin resonance and differential scanning
calorimetry. Cereal Chemistry. 67(3): 286-291.
315
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Maya Kitchen Food Service and Catering Management. pp. 65 – 66.
Mondala, A. U. (2014). Catch That Daily Egg Habit. FNRI Digest. Retrieved from:
http://www.fnri.dost.gov.ph/index.php?option=content&task=view&id=916
Navarro, L. S. et al. Homemaking for You and Me III. Food Management and
Consumerism. pp. 33-34.
PY
Pattee, A. F. Practical Dietetics: With Reference To Diet In Disease. Retrieved
from: http://chestofbooks.com/health/nutrition/Dietetics-3/Principles-In-
Cooking-Cereals.html#.UxVQwOPuIvg
Public Technical-Vocation High Schools. Department of Education
O
Republic of the Philippines.
Rojo, Duran, Cruz, Marquez, Agustin, Silva, Reyes, Quitoriano, & Bautista.
C
(1998) Practical Technology and Home Economics: Home Economics III.
Quezon City: Adriana Publishing.
Tabbada, E. V., et.al. (1993). Technology and Home Economics. Quezon City:
Phoenix Publishing House, Inc. pp. 77 – 80.
Tadle, J. D. (2002). Technology and Home Economics, Culinary Arts Fourth Year.
Manila: Phoenix Publishing House, Inc. pp. 90-103
The Professional Chef 8th Edition. (2006). The Culinary Institute of America.
Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
316
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Online Sources:
http://eu.foodinnovation.com/dictionary/B.asp
http://1.bp.blogspot.com/-3lQhBUSQkFU/TnihLsD8GbI/AAAAAAAAAIU/
hw26OiyEPS4/s1600/DSC_4814.JPG
http://ayeshahaq.files.wordpress.com/2009/08/chicken-stock.jpg
http://bbq.about.com/od/marinaderecipes/tp/Top-10-Pork-Marinade-Recipes.htm
http://cbsop.com/recipes/thick-and-creamy-potato-bacon-soup/
PY
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/cookingmethods/a/dryheatmoist.htm
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/cookingmethods/a/dryheatmoist.htm
O
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/dryheatcooking/a/deepfrying.htm
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/dryheatcooking/a/grilling.htm
C
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/dryheatcooking/a/roasting.htm
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/dryheatcooking/a/sauteing.htm
D
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/moistheatcooking/a/boiling.htm
E
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/moistheatcooking/a/braising.htm
EP
http://culinaryarts.about.com/od/moistheatcooking/a/steaming.htm
http://howtocook.casaveneracion.com/how-to-make-fish-stock/
http://mouthyhousewives.com/wendi/hey-hey-hey-its-a-cooking-planit-spice-
D
giveaway
http://panlasangpinoy.com/2013/02/12/chicken-galantina-recipe/
http://startcooking.com/public/images/IMGP4143.JPG
http://startcooking.com/public/IMG_1389.JPG
http://startcooking.com/public/IMG_4809.jpg
http://startcooking.com/public/IMG_7835-1.JPG
317
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
http://startcooking.com/seven-ways-to-present-food-like-a-chef
http://www.amazon.com/b?node=16310281
http://www.blisstree.com/2010/02/26/food/cooking-essentials-mirepoix/
http://www.chicken.org.au/page.php?id=12
http://www.ifooD.tv/recipe/white-chicken-stock
http://www.itslife.in/vegetarian-recipes/soups/carrot-cucumber-clear-vegetable-
soup
PY
http://www.lakusinA.com/wp-content/uploads/2011/10/image15.png
http://www.nfsmi.org/documentlibraryfiles/PDF/20100210101846.pdf
http://www.spike.com/articles/clyn4o/the-top-10-marinades-every-man-must-
O
know
http://www.tasteofhome.com/recipes/ham-and-cheese-frittata#ixzz36CpQIoa7
C
http://www.tasteofhome.com/recipes/ham-and-cheese-frittata#ixzz36CpQIoa7
http://www.unileverfoodsolutions.com.sg/our-services/your-menu/food-
D
presentation
http://www.videojug.com/film/how-to-make-beef-stock
E
http://www.vitaille.com/reference/techniques/fabricatechicken/fabricatechicken.
EP
php
https://www.incredibleegg.org/health-and-nutrition/egg-nutrients/nutrient-chart
D
318
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Key to Correction
Diagnostic Assessment
Key to Correction
1. D 11. C 21. D 31. A 41. D
2. B 12. A 22. D 32. D 42. A
3. D 13. C 23. C 33. A 43. C
4. A 14. D 24. A 34. B 44. B
5. C 15. B 25. C 35. C 45. B
PY
6. D 16. A 26. D 36. D 46. A
7. A 17. B 27. A or D 37. D 47. C
8. B 18. B 28. A or D 38. D 48. D
9. B 19. C 29. C 39. C 49. A
O
10. D 20. A 30. A 40. A 50. A
6. B 6. D 6. D
7. C 7. B 7. B
8. I 8. C 8. C
EP
9. D 9. D 9. D
10. F 10. D 10. D
Quarter 1
D
319
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1 Prepare Egg Dishes
Formative Assessment: (Learning Outcome 2)
1. Sunny side up
2. Basted
3. Over easy
4. Over medium
5. Over hard
PY
5. Deviled eggs
6. Salad egg
7. Stuffed egg
8. Poached egg
9. Fried egg toppings
O
10. Soft boiled egg
Lesson 2
E
1. Sifter
2. Sauce pan and pots
3. Steamer
4. Pressure cooker
5. Strainer
D
B.
Potato Cassava Wheat Cornstarch
Moisture,% 19 13 13
Ash,% 0.4 0.2 0.2
Protein, % 0.06 0.1 0.4
Lipid,% 0.05 0.1 0.8
Phosphorus% 0.08 0.01 0.06
Amylose,% 21 17 28
320
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
C.
1. Gelatinization. The sum of changes that occur in the first stages of heating starch
granules in a moist environment which includes swelling of granules as water is
absorbed and disruption of the organized granule structure.
2. Viscosity. The resistance to flow; increase in thickness or consistency. When the
newly gelatinized starch is stirred, more swollen granules break and more starch
molecules spill causing increase in viscosity or thickness.
3. Retrogadation is the process in which starch molecules, particularly the amylose
fraction, re-associate or bond together in an ordered structure after disruption by
gelatinization; ultimately a crystalline order appears.
4. Syneresis. Oozing of liquid from gel when cut and allowed to stand (e.g. jelly or
baked custard). The oozing of liquid from a rigid gel; sometimes called weeping.
5. Dextrinization. The process of forming dextrin. Dextrins – are partially hydrolyzed
PY
starches that are prepared by dry roasting starch. In home kitchens, dextrinization
is achieved by toasting of flour for polvoron, rice flour for kare-kare sauce and bread
slices for breakfast.
6. Hydrolysis Starches undergo hydrolysis during cooking or processing and during
storage of food where a chemical reaction in which a molecular linkage is broken and
O
a molecule of water is utilized.
Posttest 1
C Key to Correction
1. C 6. A 11. C 16. D 21. D
2. B 7. A 12. B 17. D 22. B
D
3. B 8. D 13. D 18. C 23. A
4. B 9. C 14. B 19. B 24. A
5. C 10. C 15. C 20. C 25. C
E
Quarter 2
EP
A.
1. D 6. A 11. B 16. B 21. D
D
321
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Lesson 1
Prepare Vegetable Dishes
Formative Assessment
A.
1. chayote - gourd family
2. corn - seeds and pods
3.bokchoy - cabbage family
4.artichoke - fruit vegetables
5.asparagus - stalks, stems and shoot
6.sweet potato - roots and tubers
7.spinach - leafy greens
8.mushroom - mushrooms
PY
9.shallot - onion family
10.bamboo shoot - stalks, stems and shoot
B.
1. Wash
2. Cutting
O
3. Soaking
4. Wash
5. Soaking
6. Peeling
7. Wash
C
Lesson 2
D
PREPARE and COOK SEAFOOD DISHES
Formative Assessment
1. Whole or round
E
2. Drawn
3. Dressed
4. Steaks
EP
5. Fillets
6. Butterflies fillet
7. Sticks or tranches
Answer Key
1. A
2. B
3. D
4. C
5. E
6. E
7. A
8. A
9. E
10. E
322
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Posttest 2
A.
1. D 6. A 11. B 16. B 21. D
2. D 7. C 16. D 17. A 22. D
3. B 8. D 17. C 18. C 23. C
4. A 9. D 18. A 19. D 24. A
5. C 10. A 19. B 20. C 25. A
B.
26. Fresh and mild odor
27. Eyes are clear, shiny and bulging
28. Red or pink gills
29. Texture of flesh is firm or elastic
PY
30. Shiny scales, and tightly cling, on skin
Quarter 3
Prepare Stocks, Sauces, Soups And Poultry And Game Dishes
Pretest 3
O
Key to Correction
1. C 6. C 11. A 16. B 21. D 26. A
2. A 7. A 12. D 17. D 22. C 27. C
3. B 8. A
C13. D 18. A 23. A 28. C
4. D 9. C 14. C 19. D 24. C 29. A
5. D 10. B 15. A 20. D 25. D 30. A
D
Lesson 1
E
1. C 1. B 1. A
2. A 2. C 2. B
3. B 3. D 3. C
4. D 4. C 4. D
5. D 5. D 5. D
D
1. C 6. D
2. B 7. C
3. D 8. A
4. D 9. C
5. C 10. D
323
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Review of Learning Outcome 3
1. C
2. C
3. C
Posttest 3
Key to Correction
1. C 6. C 11. A 16. B 21. D 26. A
2. A 7. A 12. D 17. D 22. C 27. C
3. B 8. A 13. D 18. A 23. A 28. C
4. D 9. C 14. C 19. D 24. C 29. A
5. D 10. B 15. A 20. D 25. D 30. A
PY
Quarter 4
O
Preparing and Cooking Meat
Pretest 4
1. D 11. D 21. C
2. D
C 12. D 22. C
3. D 13. D 23. B
4. C 14. C 24. D
D
5. A 15. A 25. A
6. D 16. D 26. D
E
7. B 17. B 27. D
8. C 18. C 28. C
9. A 19. A 29. A
EP
A. B. 1. C
1. C 1. C 2. B
2. E 2. E 3. B
3. B 3. D 4. A
4. D 4. A 5. A
5. A 5. B
324
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.
Posttest 4
1. D 11. D 21. C
2. D 12. D 22. C
3. D 13. D 23. B
4. C 14. C 24. D
5. A 15. A 25. A
6. D 16. D 26. D
7. B 17. B 27. D
8. C 18. C 28. C
9. A 19. A 29. A
10. A 20. A 30. A
PY
Summative Assessment
Key to Correction
1. D 11. C 21. A 31. D 41. D
O
2. C 12. D 22. D 32. D 42. A
3. A 13. A 23. A 33. C 43. C
4. C 14. B
C 24. B 34. A 44. B
5. D 15. B 25. C 35. C 45. B
6. B 16. A 26. D 36. D 46. A
D
7. D 17. B 27.D 37. A or D 47. C
8. B 18. B 28.D 38. A or D 48. D
9. D 19. C 29. C 39. C 49. A
E
325
All rights reserved. No part of this material may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means -
electronic or mechanical including photocopying – without written permission from the DepEd Central Office. First Edition, 2016.